reload.c revision 132727
1/* Search an insn for pseudo regs that must be in hard regs and are not.
2   Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
3   1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4
5This file is part of GCC.
6
7GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
8the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
9Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
10version.
11
12GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
13WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
14FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License
15for more details.
16
17You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
18along with GCC; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free
19Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
2002111-1307, USA.  */
21
22/* This file contains subroutines used only from the file reload1.c.
23   It knows how to scan one insn for operands and values
24   that need to be copied into registers to make valid code.
25   It also finds other operands and values which are valid
26   but for which equivalent values in registers exist and
27   ought to be used instead.
28
29   Before processing the first insn of the function, call `init_reload'.
30
31   To scan an insn, call `find_reloads'.  This does two things:
32   1. sets up tables describing which values must be reloaded
33   for this insn, and what kind of hard regs they must be reloaded into;
34   2. optionally record the locations where those values appear in
35   the data, so they can be replaced properly later.
36   This is done only if the second arg to `find_reloads' is nonzero.
37
38   The third arg to `find_reloads' specifies the number of levels
39   of indirect addressing supported by the machine.  If it is zero,
40   indirect addressing is not valid.  If it is one, (MEM (REG n))
41   is valid even if (REG n) did not get a hard register; if it is two,
42   (MEM (MEM (REG n))) is also valid even if (REG n) did not get a
43   hard register, and similarly for higher values.
44
45   Then you must choose the hard regs to reload those pseudo regs into,
46   and generate appropriate load insns before this insn and perhaps
47   also store insns after this insn.  Set up the array `reload_reg_rtx'
48   to contain the REG rtx's for the registers you used.  In some
49   cases `find_reloads' will return a nonzero value in `reload_reg_rtx'
50   for certain reloads.  Then that tells you which register to use,
51   so you do not need to allocate one.  But you still do need to add extra
52   instructions to copy the value into and out of that register.
53
54   Finally you must call `subst_reloads' to substitute the reload reg rtx's
55   into the locations already recorded.
56
57NOTE SIDE EFFECTS:
58
59   find_reloads can alter the operands of the instruction it is called on.
60
61   1. Two operands of any sort may be interchanged, if they are in a
62   commutative instruction.
63   This happens only if find_reloads thinks the instruction will compile
64   better that way.
65
66   2. Pseudo-registers that are equivalent to constants are replaced
67   with those constants if they are not in hard registers.
68
691 happens every time find_reloads is called.
702 happens only when REPLACE is 1, which is only when
71actually doing the reloads, not when just counting them.
72
73Using a reload register for several reloads in one insn:
74
75When an insn has reloads, it is considered as having three parts:
76the input reloads, the insn itself after reloading, and the output reloads.
77Reloads of values used in memory addresses are often needed for only one part.
78
79When this is so, reload_when_needed records which part needs the reload.
80Two reloads for different parts of the insn can share the same reload
81register.
82
83When a reload is used for addresses in multiple parts, or when it is
84an ordinary operand, it is classified as RELOAD_OTHER, and cannot share
85a register with any other reload.  */
86
87#define REG_OK_STRICT
88
89#include "config.h"
90#include "system.h"
91#include "coretypes.h"
92#include "tm.h"
93#include "rtl.h"
94#include "tm_p.h"
95#include "insn-config.h"
96#include "expr.h"
97#include "optabs.h"
98#include "recog.h"
99#include "reload.h"
100#include "regs.h"
101#include "hard-reg-set.h"
102#include "flags.h"
103#include "real.h"
104#include "output.h"
105#include "function.h"
106#include "toplev.h"
107#include "params.h"
108
109#ifndef REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
110#define REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P(REGNO, MODE) REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO)
111#endif
112
113#ifndef REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
114#define REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P(REGNO, MODE) REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO)
115#endif
116
117/* All reloads of the current insn are recorded here.  See reload.h for
118   comments.  */
119int n_reloads;
120struct reload rld[MAX_RELOADS];
121
122/* All the "earlyclobber" operands of the current insn
123   are recorded here.  */
124int n_earlyclobbers;
125rtx reload_earlyclobbers[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
126
127int reload_n_operands;
128
129/* Replacing reloads.
130
131   If `replace_reloads' is nonzero, then as each reload is recorded
132   an entry is made for it in the table `replacements'.
133   Then later `subst_reloads' can look through that table and
134   perform all the replacements needed.  */
135
136/* Nonzero means record the places to replace.  */
137static int replace_reloads;
138
139/* Each replacement is recorded with a structure like this.  */
140struct replacement
141{
142  rtx *where;			/* Location to store in */
143  rtx *subreg_loc;		/* Location of SUBREG if WHERE is inside
144				   a SUBREG; 0 otherwise.  */
145  int what;			/* which reload this is for */
146  enum machine_mode mode;	/* mode it must have */
147};
148
149static struct replacement replacements[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS * ((MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS * 2) + 1)];
150
151/* Number of replacements currently recorded.  */
152static int n_replacements;
153
154/* Used to track what is modified by an operand.  */
155struct decomposition
156{
157  int reg_flag;		/* Nonzero if referencing a register.  */
158  int safe;		/* Nonzero if this can't conflict with anything.  */
159  rtx base;		/* Base address for MEM.  */
160  HOST_WIDE_INT start;	/* Starting offset or register number.  */
161  HOST_WIDE_INT end;	/* Ending offset or register number.  */
162};
163
164#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
165
166/* Save MEMs needed to copy from one class of registers to another.  One MEM
167   is used per mode, but normally only one or two modes are ever used.
168
169   We keep two versions, before and after register elimination.  The one
170   after register elimination is record separately for each operand.  This
171   is done in case the address is not valid to be sure that we separately
172   reload each.  */
173
174static rtx secondary_memlocs[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
175static rtx secondary_memlocs_elim[NUM_MACHINE_MODES][MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
176static int secondary_memlocs_elim_used = 0;
177#endif
178
179/* The instruction we are doing reloads for;
180   so we can test whether a register dies in it.  */
181static rtx this_insn;
182
183/* Nonzero if this instruction is a user-specified asm with operands.  */
184static int this_insn_is_asm;
185
186/* If hard_regs_live_known is nonzero,
187   we can tell which hard regs are currently live,
188   at least enough to succeed in choosing dummy reloads.  */
189static int hard_regs_live_known;
190
191/* Indexed by hard reg number,
192   element is nonnegative if hard reg has been spilled.
193   This vector is passed to `find_reloads' as an argument
194   and is not changed here.  */
195static short *static_reload_reg_p;
196
197/* Set to 1 in subst_reg_equivs if it changes anything.  */
198static int subst_reg_equivs_changed;
199
200/* On return from push_reload, holds the reload-number for the OUT
201   operand, which can be different for that from the input operand.  */
202static int output_reloadnum;
203
204  /* Compare two RTX's.  */
205#define MATCHES(x, y) \
206 (x == y || (x != 0 && (GET_CODE (x) == REG				\
207			? GET_CODE (y) == REG && REGNO (x) == REGNO (y)	\
208			: rtx_equal_p (x, y) && ! side_effects_p (x))))
209
210  /* Indicates if two reloads purposes are for similar enough things that we
211     can merge their reloads.  */
212#define MERGABLE_RELOADS(when1, when2, op1, op2) \
213  ((when1) == RELOAD_OTHER || (when2) == RELOAD_OTHER	\
214   || ((when1) == (when2) && (op1) == (op2))		\
215   || ((when1) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT && (when2) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT) \
216   || ((when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS		\
217       && (when2) == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS)	\
218   || ((when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS		\
219       && (when2) == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS))
220
221  /* Nonzero if these two reload purposes produce RELOAD_OTHER when merged.  */
222#define MERGE_TO_OTHER(when1, when2, op1, op2) \
223  ((when1) != (when2)					\
224   || ! ((op1) == (op2)					\
225	 || (when1) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT			\
226	 || (when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS	\
227	 || (when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS))
228
229  /* If we are going to reload an address, compute the reload type to
230     use.  */
231#define ADDR_TYPE(type)					\
232  ((type) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS			\
233   ? RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS				\
234   : ((type) == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS		\
235      ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS			\
236      : (type)))
237
238#ifdef HAVE_SECONDARY_RELOADS
239static int push_secondary_reload (int, rtx, int, int, enum reg_class,
240				  enum machine_mode, enum reload_type,
241				  enum insn_code *);
242#endif
243static enum reg_class find_valid_class (enum machine_mode, int, unsigned int);
244static int reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (rtx, enum machine_mode, int);
245static void push_replacement (rtx *, int, enum machine_mode);
246static void dup_replacements (rtx *, rtx *);
247static void combine_reloads (void);
248static int find_reusable_reload (rtx *, rtx, enum reg_class,
249				 enum reload_type, int, int);
250static rtx find_dummy_reload (rtx, rtx, rtx *, rtx *, enum machine_mode,
251			      enum machine_mode, enum reg_class, int, int);
252static int hard_reg_set_here_p (unsigned int, unsigned int, rtx);
253static struct decomposition decompose (rtx);
254static int immune_p (rtx, rtx, struct decomposition);
255static int alternative_allows_memconst (const char *, int);
256static rtx find_reloads_toplev (rtx, int, enum reload_type, int, int, rtx,
257				int *);
258static rtx make_memloc (rtx, int);
259static int maybe_memory_address_p (enum machine_mode, rtx, rtx *);
260static int find_reloads_address (enum machine_mode, rtx *, rtx, rtx *,
261				 int, enum reload_type, int, rtx);
262static rtx subst_reg_equivs (rtx, rtx);
263static rtx subst_indexed_address (rtx);
264static void update_auto_inc_notes (rtx, int, int);
265static int find_reloads_address_1 (enum machine_mode, rtx, int, rtx *,
266				   int, enum reload_type,int, rtx);
267static void find_reloads_address_part (rtx, rtx *, enum reg_class,
268				       enum machine_mode, int,
269				       enum reload_type, int);
270static rtx find_reloads_subreg_address (rtx, int, int, enum reload_type,
271					int, rtx);
272static void copy_replacements_1 (rtx *, rtx *, int);
273static int find_inc_amount (rtx, rtx);
274
275#ifdef HAVE_SECONDARY_RELOADS
276
277/* Determine if any secondary reloads are needed for loading (if IN_P is
278   nonzero) or storing (if IN_P is zero) X to or from a reload register of
279   register class RELOAD_CLASS in mode RELOAD_MODE.  If secondary reloads
280   are needed, push them.
281
282   Return the reload number of the secondary reload we made, or -1 if
283   we didn't need one.  *PICODE is set to the insn_code to use if we do
284   need a secondary reload.  */
285
286static int
287push_secondary_reload (int in_p, rtx x, int opnum, int optional,
288		       enum reg_class reload_class,
289		       enum machine_mode reload_mode, enum reload_type type,
290		       enum insn_code *picode)
291{
292  enum reg_class class = NO_REGS;
293  enum machine_mode mode = reload_mode;
294  enum insn_code icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
295  enum reg_class t_class = NO_REGS;
296  enum machine_mode t_mode = VOIDmode;
297  enum insn_code t_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
298  enum reload_type secondary_type;
299  int s_reload, t_reload = -1;
300
301  if (type == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
302      || type == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
303      || type == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
304      || type == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
305    secondary_type = type;
306  else
307    secondary_type = in_p ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS : RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS;
308
309  *picode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
310
311  /* If X is a paradoxical SUBREG, use the inner value to determine both the
312     mode and object being reloaded.  */
313  if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
314      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
315	  > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))
316    {
317      x = SUBREG_REG (x);
318      reload_mode = GET_MODE (x);
319    }
320
321  /* If X is a pseudo-register that has an equivalent MEM (actually, if it
322     is still a pseudo-register by now, it *must* have an equivalent MEM
323     but we don't want to assume that), use that equivalent when seeing if
324     a secondary reload is needed since whether or not a reload is needed
325     might be sensitive to the form of the MEM.  */
326
327  if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
328      && reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (x)] != 0)
329    x = reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (x)];
330
331#ifdef SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
332  if (in_p)
333    class = SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (reload_class, reload_mode, x);
334#endif
335
336#ifdef SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
337  if (! in_p)
338    class = SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (reload_class, reload_mode, x);
339#endif
340
341  /* If we don't need any secondary registers, done.  */
342  if (class == NO_REGS)
343    return -1;
344
345  /* Get a possible insn to use.  If the predicate doesn't accept X, don't
346     use the insn.  */
347
348  icode = (in_p ? reload_in_optab[(int) reload_mode]
349	   : reload_out_optab[(int) reload_mode]);
350
351  if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
352      && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[in_p].predicate
353      && (! (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[in_p].predicate) (x, reload_mode)))
354    icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
355
356  /* If we will be using an insn, see if it can directly handle the reload
357     register we will be using.  If it can, the secondary reload is for a
358     scratch register.  If it can't, we will use the secondary reload for
359     an intermediate register and require a tertiary reload for the scratch
360     register.  */
361
362  if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
363    {
364      /* If IN_P is nonzero, the reload register will be the output in
365	 operand 0.  If IN_P is zero, the reload register will be the input
366	 in operand 1.  Outputs should have an initial "=", which we must
367	 skip.  */
368
369      enum reg_class insn_class;
370
371      if (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[!in_p].constraint[0] == 0)
372	insn_class = ALL_REGS;
373      else
374	{
375	  const char *insn_constraint
376	    = &insn_data[(int) icode].operand[!in_p].constraint[in_p];
377	  char insn_letter = *insn_constraint;
378	  insn_class
379	    = (insn_letter == 'r' ? GENERAL_REGS
380	       : REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT ((unsigned char) insn_letter,
381					    insn_constraint));
382
383          if (insn_class == NO_REGS)
384	    abort ();
385	  if (in_p
386	      && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[!in_p].constraint[0] != '=')
387	    abort ();
388	}
389
390      /* The scratch register's constraint must start with "=&".  */
391      if (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].constraint[0] != '='
392	  || insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].constraint[1] != '&')
393	abort ();
394
395      if (reg_class_subset_p (reload_class, insn_class))
396	mode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].mode;
397      else
398	{
399	  const char *t_constraint
400	    = &insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].constraint[2];
401	  char t_letter = *t_constraint;
402	  class = insn_class;
403	  t_mode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].mode;
404	  t_class = (t_letter == 'r' ? GENERAL_REGS
405		     : REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT ((unsigned char) t_letter,
406						  t_constraint));
407	  t_icode = icode;
408	  icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
409	}
410    }
411
412  /* This case isn't valid, so fail.  Reload is allowed to use the same
413     register for RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS and RELOAD_FOR_INPUT reloads, but
414     in the case of a secondary register, we actually need two different
415     registers for correct code.  We fail here to prevent the possibility of
416     silently generating incorrect code later.
417
418     The convention is that secondary input reloads are valid only if the
419     secondary_class is different from class.  If you have such a case, you
420     can not use secondary reloads, you must work around the problem some
421     other way.
422
423     Allow this when a reload_in/out pattern is being used.  I.e. assume
424     that the generated code handles this case.  */
425
426  if (in_p && class == reload_class && icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
427      && t_icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
428    abort ();
429
430  /* If we need a tertiary reload, see if we have one we can reuse or else
431     make a new one.  */
432
433  if (t_class != NO_REGS)
434    {
435      for (t_reload = 0; t_reload < n_reloads; t_reload++)
436	if (rld[t_reload].secondary_p
437	    && (reg_class_subset_p (t_class, rld[t_reload].class)
438		|| reg_class_subset_p (rld[t_reload].class, t_class))
439	    && ((in_p && rld[t_reload].inmode == t_mode)
440		|| (! in_p && rld[t_reload].outmode == t_mode))
441	    && ((in_p && (rld[t_reload].secondary_in_icode
442			  == CODE_FOR_nothing))
443		|| (! in_p &&(rld[t_reload].secondary_out_icode
444			      == CODE_FOR_nothing)))
445	    && (reg_class_size[(int) t_class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
446	    && MERGABLE_RELOADS (secondary_type,
447				 rld[t_reload].when_needed,
448				 opnum, rld[t_reload].opnum))
449	  {
450	    if (in_p)
451	      rld[t_reload].inmode = t_mode;
452	    if (! in_p)
453	      rld[t_reload].outmode = t_mode;
454
455	    if (reg_class_subset_p (t_class, rld[t_reload].class))
456	      rld[t_reload].class = t_class;
457
458	    rld[t_reload].opnum = MIN (rld[t_reload].opnum, opnum);
459	    rld[t_reload].optional &= optional;
460	    rld[t_reload].secondary_p = 1;
461	    if (MERGE_TO_OTHER (secondary_type, rld[t_reload].when_needed,
462				opnum, rld[t_reload].opnum))
463	      rld[t_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
464	  }
465
466      if (t_reload == n_reloads)
467	{
468	  /* We need to make a new tertiary reload for this register class.  */
469	  rld[t_reload].in = rld[t_reload].out = 0;
470	  rld[t_reload].class = t_class;
471	  rld[t_reload].inmode = in_p ? t_mode : VOIDmode;
472	  rld[t_reload].outmode = ! in_p ? t_mode : VOIDmode;
473	  rld[t_reload].reg_rtx = 0;
474	  rld[t_reload].optional = optional;
475	  rld[t_reload].inc = 0;
476	  /* Maybe we could combine these, but it seems too tricky.  */
477	  rld[t_reload].nocombine = 1;
478	  rld[t_reload].in_reg = 0;
479	  rld[t_reload].out_reg = 0;
480	  rld[t_reload].opnum = opnum;
481	  rld[t_reload].when_needed = secondary_type;
482	  rld[t_reload].secondary_in_reload = -1;
483	  rld[t_reload].secondary_out_reload = -1;
484	  rld[t_reload].secondary_in_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
485	  rld[t_reload].secondary_out_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
486	  rld[t_reload].secondary_p = 1;
487
488	  n_reloads++;
489	}
490    }
491
492  /* See if we can reuse an existing secondary reload.  */
493  for (s_reload = 0; s_reload < n_reloads; s_reload++)
494    if (rld[s_reload].secondary_p
495	&& (reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[s_reload].class)
496	    || reg_class_subset_p (rld[s_reload].class, class))
497	&& ((in_p && rld[s_reload].inmode == mode)
498	    || (! in_p && rld[s_reload].outmode == mode))
499	&& ((in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_in_reload == t_reload)
500	    || (! in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_out_reload == t_reload))
501	&& ((in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_in_icode == t_icode)
502	    || (! in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_out_icode == t_icode))
503	&& (reg_class_size[(int) class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
504	&& MERGABLE_RELOADS (secondary_type, rld[s_reload].when_needed,
505			     opnum, rld[s_reload].opnum))
506      {
507	if (in_p)
508	  rld[s_reload].inmode = mode;
509	if (! in_p)
510	  rld[s_reload].outmode = mode;
511
512	if (reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[s_reload].class))
513	  rld[s_reload].class = class;
514
515	rld[s_reload].opnum = MIN (rld[s_reload].opnum, opnum);
516	rld[s_reload].optional &= optional;
517	rld[s_reload].secondary_p = 1;
518	if (MERGE_TO_OTHER (secondary_type, rld[s_reload].when_needed,
519			    opnum, rld[s_reload].opnum))
520	  rld[s_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
521      }
522
523  if (s_reload == n_reloads)
524    {
525#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
526      /* If we need a memory location to copy between the two reload regs,
527	 set it up now.  Note that we do the input case before making
528	 the reload and the output case after.  This is due to the
529	 way reloads are output.  */
530
531      if (in_p && icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
532	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (class, reload_class, mode))
533	{
534	  get_secondary_mem (x, reload_mode, opnum, type);
535
536	  /* We may have just added new reloads.  Make sure we add
537	     the new reload at the end.  */
538	  s_reload = n_reloads;
539	}
540#endif
541
542      /* We need to make a new secondary reload for this register class.  */
543      rld[s_reload].in = rld[s_reload].out = 0;
544      rld[s_reload].class = class;
545
546      rld[s_reload].inmode = in_p ? mode : VOIDmode;
547      rld[s_reload].outmode = ! in_p ? mode : VOIDmode;
548      rld[s_reload].reg_rtx = 0;
549      rld[s_reload].optional = optional;
550      rld[s_reload].inc = 0;
551      /* Maybe we could combine these, but it seems too tricky.  */
552      rld[s_reload].nocombine = 1;
553      rld[s_reload].in_reg = 0;
554      rld[s_reload].out_reg = 0;
555      rld[s_reload].opnum = opnum;
556      rld[s_reload].when_needed = secondary_type;
557      rld[s_reload].secondary_in_reload = in_p ? t_reload : -1;
558      rld[s_reload].secondary_out_reload = ! in_p ? t_reload : -1;
559      rld[s_reload].secondary_in_icode = in_p ? t_icode : CODE_FOR_nothing;
560      rld[s_reload].secondary_out_icode
561	= ! in_p ? t_icode : CODE_FOR_nothing;
562      rld[s_reload].secondary_p = 1;
563
564      n_reloads++;
565
566#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
567      if (! in_p && icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
568	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (reload_class, class, mode))
569	get_secondary_mem (x, mode, opnum, type);
570#endif
571    }
572
573  *picode = icode;
574  return s_reload;
575}
576#endif /* HAVE_SECONDARY_RELOADS */
577
578#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
579
580/* Return a memory location that will be used to copy X in mode MODE.
581   If we haven't already made a location for this mode in this insn,
582   call find_reloads_address on the location being returned.  */
583
584rtx
585get_secondary_mem (rtx x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, enum machine_mode mode,
586		   int opnum, enum reload_type type)
587{
588  rtx loc;
589  int mem_valid;
590
591  /* By default, if MODE is narrower than a word, widen it to a word.
592     This is required because most machines that require these memory
593     locations do not support short load and stores from all registers
594     (e.g., FP registers).  */
595
596#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
597  mode = SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (mode);
598#else
599  if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < BITS_PER_WORD && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode))
600    mode = mode_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_CLASS (mode), 0);
601#endif
602
603  /* If we already have made a MEM for this operand in MODE, return it.  */
604  if (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) mode][opnum] != 0)
605    return secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) mode][opnum];
606
607  /* If this is the first time we've tried to get a MEM for this mode,
608     allocate a new one.  `something_changed' in reload will get set
609     by noticing that the frame size has changed.  */
610
611  if (secondary_memlocs[(int) mode] == 0)
612    {
613#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
614      secondary_memlocs[(int) mode] = SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (mode);
615#else
616      secondary_memlocs[(int) mode]
617	= assign_stack_local (mode, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), 0);
618#endif
619    }
620
621  /* Get a version of the address doing any eliminations needed.  If that
622     didn't give us a new MEM, make a new one if it isn't valid.  */
623
624  loc = eliminate_regs (secondary_memlocs[(int) mode], VOIDmode, NULL_RTX);
625  mem_valid = strict_memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (loc, 0));
626
627  if (! mem_valid && loc == secondary_memlocs[(int) mode])
628    loc = copy_rtx (loc);
629
630  /* The only time the call below will do anything is if the stack
631     offset is too large.  In that case IND_LEVELS doesn't matter, so we
632     can just pass a zero.  Adjust the type to be the address of the
633     corresponding object.  If the address was valid, save the eliminated
634     address.  If it wasn't valid, we need to make a reload each time, so
635     don't save it.  */
636
637  if (! mem_valid)
638    {
639      type =  (type == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
640	       : type == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
641	       : RELOAD_OTHER);
642
643      find_reloads_address (mode, &loc, XEXP (loc, 0), &XEXP (loc, 0),
644			    opnum, type, 0, 0);
645    }
646
647  secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) mode][opnum] = loc;
648  if (secondary_memlocs_elim_used <= (int)mode)
649    secondary_memlocs_elim_used = (int)mode + 1;
650  return loc;
651}
652
653/* Clear any secondary memory locations we've made.  */
654
655void
656clear_secondary_mem (void)
657{
658  memset (secondary_memlocs, 0, sizeof secondary_memlocs);
659}
660#endif /* SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED */
661
662/* Find the largest class for which every register number plus N is valid in
663   M1 (if in range) and is cheap to move into REGNO.
664   Abort if no such class exists.  */
665
666static enum reg_class
667find_valid_class (enum machine_mode m1 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int n,
668		  unsigned int dest_regno ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
669{
670  int best_cost = -1;
671  int class;
672  int regno;
673  enum reg_class best_class = NO_REGS;
674  enum reg_class dest_class ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED = REGNO_REG_CLASS (dest_regno);
675  unsigned int best_size = 0;
676  int cost;
677
678  for (class = 1; class < N_REG_CLASSES; class++)
679    {
680      int bad = 0;
681      for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && ! bad; regno++)
682	if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[class], regno)
683	    && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[class], regno + n)
684	    && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno + n, m1))
685	  bad = 1;
686
687      if (bad)
688	continue;
689      cost = REGISTER_MOVE_COST (m1, class, dest_class);
690
691      if ((reg_class_size[class] > best_size
692	   && (best_cost < 0 || best_cost >= cost))
693	  || best_cost > cost)
694	{
695	  best_class = class;
696	  best_size = reg_class_size[class];
697	  best_cost = REGISTER_MOVE_COST (m1, class, dest_class);
698	}
699    }
700
701  if (best_size == 0)
702    abort ();
703
704  return best_class;
705}
706
707/* Return the number of a previously made reload that can be combined with
708   a new one, or n_reloads if none of the existing reloads can be used.
709   OUT, CLASS, TYPE and OPNUM are the same arguments as passed to
710   push_reload, they determine the kind of the new reload that we try to
711   combine.  P_IN points to the corresponding value of IN, which can be
712   modified by this function.
713   DONT_SHARE is nonzero if we can't share any input-only reload for IN.  */
714
715static int
716find_reusable_reload (rtx *p_in, rtx out, enum reg_class class,
717		      enum reload_type type, int opnum, int dont_share)
718{
719  rtx in = *p_in;
720  int i;
721  /* We can't merge two reloads if the output of either one is
722     earlyclobbered.  */
723
724  if (earlyclobber_operand_p (out))
725    return n_reloads;
726
727  /* We can use an existing reload if the class is right
728     and at least one of IN and OUT is a match
729     and the other is at worst neutral.
730     (A zero compared against anything is neutral.)
731
732     If SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES, don't use existing reloads unless they are
733     for the same thing since that can cause us to need more reload registers
734     than we otherwise would.  */
735
736  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
737    if ((reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[i].class)
738	 || reg_class_subset_p (rld[i].class, class))
739	/* If the existing reload has a register, it must fit our class.  */
740	&& (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
741	    || TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
742				  true_regnum (rld[i].reg_rtx)))
743	&& ((in != 0 && MATCHES (rld[i].in, in) && ! dont_share
744	     && (out == 0 || rld[i].out == 0 || MATCHES (rld[i].out, out)))
745	    || (out != 0 && MATCHES (rld[i].out, out)
746		&& (in == 0 || rld[i].in == 0 || MATCHES (rld[i].in, in))))
747	&& (rld[i].out == 0 || ! earlyclobber_operand_p (rld[i].out))
748	&& (reg_class_size[(int) class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
749	&& MERGABLE_RELOADS (type, rld[i].when_needed, opnum, rld[i].opnum))
750      return i;
751
752  /* Reloading a plain reg for input can match a reload to postincrement
753     that reg, since the postincrement's value is the right value.
754     Likewise, it can match a preincrement reload, since we regard
755     the preincrementation as happening before any ref in this insn
756     to that register.  */
757  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
758    if ((reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[i].class)
759	 || reg_class_subset_p (rld[i].class, class))
760	/* If the existing reload has a register, it must fit our
761	   class.  */
762	&& (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
763	    || TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
764				  true_regnum (rld[i].reg_rtx)))
765	&& out == 0 && rld[i].out == 0 && rld[i].in != 0
766	&& ((GET_CODE (in) == REG
767	     && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (rld[i].in)) == 'a'
768	     && MATCHES (XEXP (rld[i].in, 0), in))
769	    || (GET_CODE (rld[i].in) == REG
770		&& GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (in)) == 'a'
771		&& MATCHES (XEXP (in, 0), rld[i].in)))
772	&& (rld[i].out == 0 || ! earlyclobber_operand_p (rld[i].out))
773	&& (reg_class_size[(int) class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
774	&& MERGABLE_RELOADS (type, rld[i].when_needed,
775			     opnum, rld[i].opnum))
776      {
777	/* Make sure reload_in ultimately has the increment,
778	   not the plain register.  */
779	if (GET_CODE (in) == REG)
780	  *p_in = rld[i].in;
781	return i;
782      }
783  return n_reloads;
784}
785
786/* Return nonzero if X is a SUBREG which will require reloading of its
787   SUBREG_REG expression.  */
788
789static int
790reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, int output)
791{
792  rtx inner;
793
794  /* Only SUBREGs are problematical.  */
795  if (GET_CODE (x) != SUBREG)
796    return 0;
797
798  inner = SUBREG_REG (x);
799
800  /* If INNER is a constant or PLUS, then INNER must be reloaded.  */
801  if (CONSTANT_P (inner) || GET_CODE (inner) == PLUS)
802    return 1;
803
804  /* If INNER is not a hard register, then INNER will not need to
805     be reloaded.  */
806  if (GET_CODE (inner) != REG
807      || REGNO (inner) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
808    return 0;
809
810  /* If INNER is not ok for MODE, then INNER will need reloading.  */
811  if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (subreg_regno (x), mode))
812    return 1;
813
814  /* If the outer part is a word or smaller, INNER larger than a
815     word and the number of regs for INNER is not the same as the
816     number of words in INNER, then INNER will need reloading.  */
817  return (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
818	  && output
819	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) > UNITS_PER_WORD
820	  && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
821	      != (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (inner), GET_MODE (inner))));
822}
823
824/* Return nonzero if IN can be reloaded into REGNO with mode MODE without
825   requiring an extra reload register.  The caller has already found that
826   IN contains some reference to REGNO, so check that we can produce the
827   new value in a single step.  E.g. if we have
828   (set (reg r13) (plus (reg r13) (const int 1))), and there is an
829   instruction that adds one to a register, this should succeed.
830   However, if we have something like
831   (set (reg r13) (plus (reg r13) (const int 999))), and the constant 999
832   needs to be loaded into a register first, we need a separate reload
833   register.
834   Such PLUS reloads are generated by find_reload_address_part.
835   The out-of-range PLUS expressions are usually introduced in the instruction
836   patterns by register elimination and substituting pseudos without a home
837   by their function-invariant equivalences.  */
838static int
839can_reload_into (rtx in, int regno, enum machine_mode mode)
840{
841  rtx dst, test_insn;
842  int r = 0;
843  struct recog_data save_recog_data;
844
845  /* For matching constraints, we often get notional input reloads where
846     we want to use the original register as the reload register.  I.e.
847     technically this is a non-optional input-output reload, but IN is
848     already a valid register, and has been chosen as the reload register.
849     Speed this up, since it trivially works.  */
850  if (GET_CODE (in) == REG)
851    return 1;
852
853  /* To test MEMs properly, we'd have to take into account all the reloads
854     that are already scheduled, which can become quite complicated.
855     And since we've already handled address reloads for this MEM, it
856     should always succeed anyway.  */
857  if (GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
858    return 1;
859
860  /* If we can make a simple SET insn that does the job, everything should
861     be fine.  */
862  dst =  gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
863  test_insn = make_insn_raw (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dst, in));
864  save_recog_data = recog_data;
865  if (recog_memoized (test_insn) >= 0)
866    {
867      extract_insn (test_insn);
868      r = constrain_operands (1);
869    }
870  recog_data = save_recog_data;
871  return r;
872}
873
874/* Record one reload that needs to be performed.
875   IN is an rtx saying where the data are to be found before this instruction.
876   OUT says where they must be stored after the instruction.
877   (IN is zero for data not read, and OUT is zero for data not written.)
878   INLOC and OUTLOC point to the places in the instructions where
879   IN and OUT were found.
880   If IN and OUT are both nonzero, it means the same register must be used
881   to reload both IN and OUT.
882
883   CLASS is a register class required for the reloaded data.
884   INMODE is the machine mode that the instruction requires
885   for the reg that replaces IN and OUTMODE is likewise for OUT.
886
887   If IN is zero, then OUT's location and mode should be passed as
888   INLOC and INMODE.
889
890   STRICT_LOW is the 1 if there is a containing STRICT_LOW_PART rtx.
891
892   OPTIONAL nonzero means this reload does not need to be performed:
893   it can be discarded if that is more convenient.
894
895   OPNUM and TYPE say what the purpose of this reload is.
896
897   The return value is the reload-number for this reload.
898
899   If both IN and OUT are nonzero, in some rare cases we might
900   want to make two separate reloads.  (Actually we never do this now.)
901   Therefore, the reload-number for OUT is stored in
902   output_reloadnum when we return; the return value applies to IN.
903   Usually (presently always), when IN and OUT are nonzero,
904   the two reload-numbers are equal, but the caller should be careful to
905   distinguish them.  */
906
907int
908push_reload (rtx in, rtx out, rtx *inloc, rtx *outloc,
909	     enum reg_class class, enum machine_mode inmode,
910	     enum machine_mode outmode, int strict_low, int optional,
911	     int opnum, enum reload_type type)
912{
913  int i;
914  int dont_share = 0;
915  int dont_remove_subreg = 0;
916  rtx *in_subreg_loc = 0, *out_subreg_loc = 0;
917  int secondary_in_reload = -1, secondary_out_reload = -1;
918  enum insn_code secondary_in_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
919  enum insn_code secondary_out_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
920
921  /* INMODE and/or OUTMODE could be VOIDmode if no mode
922     has been specified for the operand.  In that case,
923     use the operand's mode as the mode to reload.  */
924  if (inmode == VOIDmode && in != 0)
925    inmode = GET_MODE (in);
926  if (outmode == VOIDmode && out != 0)
927    outmode = GET_MODE (out);
928
929  /* If IN is a pseudo register everywhere-equivalent to a constant, and
930     it is not in a hard register, reload straight from the constant,
931     since we want to get rid of such pseudo registers.
932     Often this is done earlier, but not always in find_reloads_address.  */
933  if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == REG)
934    {
935      int regno = REGNO (in);
936
937      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
938	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
939	in = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
940    }
941
942  /* Likewise for OUT.  Of course, OUT will never be equivalent to
943     an actual constant, but it might be equivalent to a memory location
944     (in the case of a parameter).  */
945  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == REG)
946    {
947      int regno = REGNO (out);
948
949      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
950	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
951	out = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
952    }
953
954  /* If we have a read-write operand with an address side-effect,
955     change either IN or OUT so the side-effect happens only once.  */
956  if (in != 0 && out != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == MEM && rtx_equal_p (in, out))
957    switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (in, 0)))
958      {
959      case POST_INC: case POST_DEC:   case POST_MODIFY:
960	in = replace_equiv_address_nv (in, XEXP (XEXP (in, 0), 0));
961	break;
962
963      case PRE_INC: case PRE_DEC: case PRE_MODIFY:
964	out = replace_equiv_address_nv (out, XEXP (XEXP (out, 0), 0));
965	break;
966
967      default:
968	break;
969      }
970
971  /* If we are reloading a (SUBREG constant ...), really reload just the
972     inside expression in its own mode.  Similarly for (SUBREG (PLUS ...)).
973     If we have (SUBREG:M1 (MEM:M2 ...) ...) (or an inner REG that is still
974     a pseudo and hence will become a MEM) with M1 wider than M2 and the
975     register is a pseudo, also reload the inside expression.
976     For machines that extend byte loads, do this for any SUBREG of a pseudo
977     where both M1 and M2 are a word or smaller, M1 is wider than M2, and
978     M2 is an integral mode that gets extended when loaded.
979     Similar issue for (SUBREG:M1 (REG:M2 ...) ...) for a hard register R where
980     either M1 is not valid for R or M2 is wider than a word but we only
981     need one word to store an M2-sized quantity in R.
982     (However, if OUT is nonzero, we need to reload the reg *and*
983     the subreg, so do nothing here, and let following statement handle it.)
984
985     Note that the case of (SUBREG (CONST_INT...)...) is handled elsewhere;
986     we can't handle it here because CONST_INT does not indicate a mode.
987
988     Similarly, we must reload the inside expression if we have a
989     STRICT_LOW_PART (presumably, in == out in the cas).
990
991     Also reload the inner expression if it does not require a secondary
992     reload but the SUBREG does.
993
994     Finally, reload the inner expression if it is a register that is in
995     the class whose registers cannot be referenced in a different size
996     and M1 is not the same size as M2.  If subreg_lowpart_p is false, we
997     cannot reload just the inside since we might end up with the wrong
998     register class.  But if it is inside a STRICT_LOW_PART, we have
999     no choice, so we hope we do get the right register class there.  */
1000
1001  if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG
1002      && (subreg_lowpart_p (in) || strict_low)
1003#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1004      && !CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)), inmode, class)
1005#endif
1006      && (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (in))
1007	  || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == PLUS
1008	  || strict_low
1009	  || (((GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1010		&& REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1011	       || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == MEM)
1012	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1013		   > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))))
1014#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
1015		  || (GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
1016		      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1017			  <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
1018		      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1019			  > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))))
1020		      && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1021		      && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))) != NIL)
1022#endif
1023#ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
1024		  || ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1025		       < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))))
1026		      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD ==
1027			  ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))) - 1)
1028			   / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
1029#endif
1030		  ))
1031	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1032	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1033	      /* The case where out is nonzero
1034		 is handled differently in the following statement.  */
1035	      && (out == 0 || subreg_lowpart_p (in))
1036	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
1037		   && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1038		       > UNITS_PER_WORD)
1039		   && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1040			/ UNITS_PER_WORD)
1041		       != (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1042						  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))))
1043		  || ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (subreg_regno (in), inmode)))
1044#ifdef SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1045	  || (SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class, inmode, in) != NO_REGS
1046	      && (SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class,
1047						GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1048						SUBREG_REG (in))
1049		  == NO_REGS))
1050#endif
1051#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1052	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1053	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1054	      && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P
1055	      (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)), inmode))
1056#endif
1057	  ))
1058    {
1059      in_subreg_loc = inloc;
1060      inloc = &SUBREG_REG (in);
1061      in = *inloc;
1062#if ! defined (LOAD_EXTEND_OP) && ! defined (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS)
1063      if (GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
1064	/* This is supposed to happen only for paradoxical subregs made by
1065	   combine.c.  (SUBREG (MEM)) isn't supposed to occur other ways.  */
1066	if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (in)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode))
1067	  abort ();
1068#endif
1069      inmode = GET_MODE (in);
1070    }
1071
1072  /* Similar issue for (SUBREG:M1 (REG:M2 ...) ...) for a hard register R where
1073     either M1 is not valid for R or M2 is wider than a word but we only
1074     need one word to store an M2-sized quantity in R.
1075
1076     However, we must reload the inner reg *as well as* the subreg in
1077     that case.  */
1078
1079  /* Similar issue for (SUBREG constant ...) if it was not handled by the
1080     code above.  This can happen if SUBREG_BYTE != 0.  */
1081
1082  if (in != 0 && reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (in, inmode, 0))
1083    {
1084      enum reg_class in_class = class;
1085
1086      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG)
1087	in_class
1088	  = find_valid_class (inmode,
1089			      subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1090						   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1091						   SUBREG_BYTE (in),
1092						   GET_MODE (in)),
1093			      REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)));
1094
1095      /* This relies on the fact that emit_reload_insns outputs the
1096	 instructions for input reloads of type RELOAD_OTHER in the same
1097	 order as the reloads.  Thus if the outer reload is also of type
1098	 RELOAD_OTHER, we are guaranteed that this inner reload will be
1099	 output before the outer reload.  */
1100      push_reload (SUBREG_REG (in), NULL_RTX, &SUBREG_REG (in), (rtx *) 0,
1101		   in_class, VOIDmode, VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
1102      dont_remove_subreg = 1;
1103    }
1104
1105  /* Similarly for paradoxical and problematical SUBREGs on the output.
1106     Note that there is no reason we need worry about the previous value
1107     of SUBREG_REG (out); even if wider than out,
1108     storing in a subreg is entitled to clobber it all
1109     (except in the case of STRICT_LOW_PART,
1110     and in that case the constraint should label it input-output.)  */
1111  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG
1112      && (subreg_lowpart_p (out) || strict_low)
1113#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1114      && !CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)), outmode, class)
1115#endif
1116      && (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (out))
1117	  || strict_low
1118	  || (((GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1119		&& REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1120	       || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == MEM)
1121	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode)
1122		   > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out))))
1123#ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
1124		  || ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode)
1125		       < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out))))
1126		      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD ==
1127			  ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out))) - 1)
1128			   / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
1129#endif
1130		  ))
1131	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1132	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1133	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
1134		   && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)))
1135		       > UNITS_PER_WORD)
1136		   && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)))
1137			/ UNITS_PER_WORD)
1138		       != (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1139						  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)))))
1140		  || ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (subreg_regno (out), outmode)))
1141#ifdef SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1142	  || (SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class, outmode, out) != NO_REGS
1143	      && (SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class,
1144						 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1145						 SUBREG_REG (out))
1146		  == NO_REGS))
1147#endif
1148#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1149	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1150	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1151	      && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1152					   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1153					   outmode))
1154#endif
1155	  ))
1156    {
1157      out_subreg_loc = outloc;
1158      outloc = &SUBREG_REG (out);
1159      out = *outloc;
1160#if ! defined (LOAD_EXTEND_OP) && ! defined (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS)
1161      if (GET_CODE (out) == MEM
1162	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (out)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode))
1163	abort ();
1164#endif
1165      outmode = GET_MODE (out);
1166    }
1167
1168  /* Similar issue for (SUBREG:M1 (REG:M2 ...) ...) for a hard register R where
1169     either M1 is not valid for R or M2 is wider than a word but we only
1170     need one word to store an M2-sized quantity in R.
1171
1172     However, we must reload the inner reg *as well as* the subreg in
1173     that case.  In this case, the inner reg is an in-out reload.  */
1174
1175  if (out != 0 && reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (out, outmode, 1))
1176    {
1177      /* This relies on the fact that emit_reload_insns outputs the
1178	 instructions for output reloads of type RELOAD_OTHER in reverse
1179	 order of the reloads.  Thus if the outer reload is also of type
1180	 RELOAD_OTHER, we are guaranteed that this inner reload will be
1181	 output after the outer reload.  */
1182      dont_remove_subreg = 1;
1183      push_reload (SUBREG_REG (out), SUBREG_REG (out), &SUBREG_REG (out),
1184		   &SUBREG_REG (out),
1185		   find_valid_class (outmode,
1186				     subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1187							  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1188							  SUBREG_BYTE (out),
1189							  GET_MODE (out)),
1190				     REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out))),
1191		   VOIDmode, VOIDmode, 0, 0,
1192		   opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
1193    }
1194
1195  /* If IN appears in OUT, we can't share any input-only reload for IN.  */
1196  if (in != 0 && out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == MEM
1197      && (GET_CODE (in) == REG || GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
1198      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (in, XEXP (out, 0)))
1199    dont_share = 1;
1200
1201  /* If IN is a SUBREG of a hard register, make a new REG.  This
1202     simplifies some of the cases below.  */
1203
1204  if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1205      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1206      && ! dont_remove_subreg)
1207    in = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (in), subreg_regno (in));
1208
1209  /* Similarly for OUT.  */
1210  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG
1211      && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1212      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1213      && ! dont_remove_subreg)
1214    out = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (out), subreg_regno (out));
1215
1216  /* Narrow down the class of register wanted if that is
1217     desirable on this machine for efficiency.  */
1218  if (in != 0)
1219    class = PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (in, class);
1220
1221  /* Output reloads may need analogous treatment, different in detail.  */
1222#ifdef PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1223  if (out != 0)
1224    class = PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (out, class);
1225#endif
1226
1227  /* Make sure we use a class that can handle the actual pseudo
1228     inside any subreg.  For example, on the 386, QImode regs
1229     can appear within SImode subregs.  Although GENERAL_REGS
1230     can handle SImode, QImode needs a smaller class.  */
1231#ifdef LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1232  if (in_subreg_loc)
1233    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (inmode, class);
1234  else if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG)
1235    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)), class);
1236
1237  if (out_subreg_loc)
1238    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (outmode, class);
1239  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG)
1240    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)), class);
1241#endif
1242
1243  /* Verify that this class is at least possible for the mode that
1244     is specified.  */
1245  if (this_insn_is_asm)
1246    {
1247      enum machine_mode mode;
1248      if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode))
1249	mode = inmode;
1250      else
1251	mode = outmode;
1252      if (mode == VOIDmode)
1253	{
1254	  error_for_asm (this_insn, "cannot reload integer constant operand in `asm'");
1255	  mode = word_mode;
1256	  if (in != 0)
1257	    inmode = word_mode;
1258	  if (out != 0)
1259	    outmode = word_mode;
1260	}
1261      for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
1262	if (HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (i, mode)
1263	    && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class], i))
1264	  {
1265	    int nregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (i, mode);
1266
1267	    int j;
1268	    for (j = 1; j < nregs; j++)
1269	      if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class], i + j))
1270		break;
1271	    if (j == nregs)
1272	      break;
1273	  }
1274      if (i == FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1275	{
1276	  error_for_asm (this_insn, "impossible register constraint in `asm'");
1277	  class = ALL_REGS;
1278	}
1279    }
1280
1281  /* Optional output reloads are always OK even if we have no register class,
1282     since the function of these reloads is only to have spill_reg_store etc.
1283     set, so that the storing insn can be deleted later.  */
1284  if (class == NO_REGS
1285      && (optional == 0 || type != RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT))
1286    abort ();
1287
1288  i = find_reusable_reload (&in, out, class, type, opnum, dont_share);
1289
1290  if (i == n_reloads)
1291    {
1292      /* See if we need a secondary reload register to move between CLASS
1293	 and IN or CLASS and OUT.  Get the icode and push any required reloads
1294	 needed for each of them if so.  */
1295
1296#ifdef SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1297      if (in != 0)
1298	secondary_in_reload
1299	  = push_secondary_reload (1, in, opnum, optional, class, inmode, type,
1300				   &secondary_in_icode);
1301#endif
1302
1303#ifdef SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1304      if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) != SCRATCH)
1305	secondary_out_reload
1306	  = push_secondary_reload (0, out, opnum, optional, class, outmode,
1307				   type, &secondary_out_icode);
1308#endif
1309
1310      /* We found no existing reload suitable for re-use.
1311	 So add an additional reload.  */
1312
1313#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1314      /* If a memory location is needed for the copy, make one.  */
1315      if (in != 0 && (GET_CODE (in) == REG || GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG)
1316	  && reg_or_subregno (in) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1317	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (REGNO_REG_CLASS (reg_or_subregno (in)),
1318				      class, inmode))
1319	get_secondary_mem (in, inmode, opnum, type);
1320#endif
1321
1322      i = n_reloads;
1323      rld[i].in = in;
1324      rld[i].out = out;
1325      rld[i].class = class;
1326      rld[i].inmode = inmode;
1327      rld[i].outmode = outmode;
1328      rld[i].reg_rtx = 0;
1329      rld[i].optional = optional;
1330      rld[i].inc = 0;
1331      rld[i].nocombine = 0;
1332      rld[i].in_reg = inloc ? *inloc : 0;
1333      rld[i].out_reg = outloc ? *outloc : 0;
1334      rld[i].opnum = opnum;
1335      rld[i].when_needed = type;
1336      rld[i].secondary_in_reload = secondary_in_reload;
1337      rld[i].secondary_out_reload = secondary_out_reload;
1338      rld[i].secondary_in_icode = secondary_in_icode;
1339      rld[i].secondary_out_icode = secondary_out_icode;
1340      rld[i].secondary_p = 0;
1341
1342      n_reloads++;
1343
1344#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1345      if (out != 0 && (GET_CODE (out) == REG || GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG)
1346	  && reg_or_subregno (out) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1347	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (class,
1348				      REGNO_REG_CLASS (reg_or_subregno (out)),
1349				      outmode))
1350	get_secondary_mem (out, outmode, opnum, type);
1351#endif
1352    }
1353  else
1354    {
1355      /* We are reusing an existing reload,
1356	 but we may have additional information for it.
1357	 For example, we may now have both IN and OUT
1358	 while the old one may have just one of them.  */
1359
1360      /* The modes can be different.  If they are, we want to reload in
1361	 the larger mode, so that the value is valid for both modes.  */
1362      if (inmode != VOIDmode
1363	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].inmode))
1364	rld[i].inmode = inmode;
1365      if (outmode != VOIDmode
1366	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].outmode))
1367	rld[i].outmode = outmode;
1368      if (in != 0)
1369	{
1370	  rtx in_reg = inloc ? *inloc : 0;
1371	  /* If we merge reloads for two distinct rtl expressions that
1372	     are identical in content, there might be duplicate address
1373	     reloads.  Remove the extra set now, so that if we later find
1374	     that we can inherit this reload, we can get rid of the
1375	     address reloads altogether.
1376
1377	     Do not do this if both reloads are optional since the result
1378	     would be an optional reload which could potentially leave
1379	     unresolved address replacements.
1380
1381	     It is not sufficient to call transfer_replacements since
1382	     choose_reload_regs will remove the replacements for address
1383	     reloads of inherited reloads which results in the same
1384	     problem.  */
1385	  if (rld[i].in != in && rtx_equal_p (in, rld[i].in)
1386	      && ! (rld[i].optional && optional))
1387	    {
1388	      /* We must keep the address reload with the lower operand
1389		 number alive.  */
1390	      if (opnum > rld[i].opnum)
1391		{
1392		  remove_address_replacements (in);
1393		  in = rld[i].in;
1394		  in_reg = rld[i].in_reg;
1395		}
1396	      else
1397		remove_address_replacements (rld[i].in);
1398	    }
1399	  rld[i].in = in;
1400	  rld[i].in_reg = in_reg;
1401	}
1402      if (out != 0)
1403	{
1404	  rld[i].out = out;
1405	  rld[i].out_reg = outloc ? *outloc : 0;
1406	}
1407      if (reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[i].class))
1408	rld[i].class = class;
1409      rld[i].optional &= optional;
1410      if (MERGE_TO_OTHER (type, rld[i].when_needed,
1411			  opnum, rld[i].opnum))
1412	rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
1413      rld[i].opnum = MIN (rld[i].opnum, opnum);
1414    }
1415
1416  /* If the ostensible rtx being reloaded differs from the rtx found
1417     in the location to substitute, this reload is not safe to combine
1418     because we cannot reliably tell whether it appears in the insn.  */
1419
1420  if (in != 0 && in != *inloc)
1421    rld[i].nocombine = 1;
1422
1423#if 0
1424  /* This was replaced by changes in find_reloads_address_1 and the new
1425     function inc_for_reload, which go with a new meaning of reload_inc.  */
1426
1427  /* If this is an IN/OUT reload in an insn that sets the CC,
1428     it must be for an autoincrement.  It doesn't work to store
1429     the incremented value after the insn because that would clobber the CC.
1430     So we must do the increment of the value reloaded from,
1431     increment it, store it back, then decrement again.  */
1432  if (out != 0 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (this_insn)))
1433    {
1434      out = 0;
1435      rld[i].out = 0;
1436      rld[i].inc = find_inc_amount (PATTERN (this_insn), in);
1437      /* If we did not find a nonzero amount-to-increment-by,
1438	 that contradicts the belief that IN is being incremented
1439	 in an address in this insn.  */
1440      if (rld[i].inc == 0)
1441	abort ();
1442    }
1443#endif
1444
1445  /* If we will replace IN and OUT with the reload-reg,
1446     record where they are located so that substitution need
1447     not do a tree walk.  */
1448
1449  if (replace_reloads)
1450    {
1451      if (inloc != 0)
1452	{
1453	  struct replacement *r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
1454	  r->what = i;
1455	  r->subreg_loc = in_subreg_loc;
1456	  r->where = inloc;
1457	  r->mode = inmode;
1458	}
1459      if (outloc != 0 && outloc != inloc)
1460	{
1461	  struct replacement *r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
1462	  r->what = i;
1463	  r->where = outloc;
1464	  r->subreg_loc = out_subreg_loc;
1465	  r->mode = outmode;
1466	}
1467    }
1468
1469  /* If this reload is just being introduced and it has both
1470     an incoming quantity and an outgoing quantity that are
1471     supposed to be made to match, see if either one of the two
1472     can serve as the place to reload into.
1473
1474     If one of them is acceptable, set rld[i].reg_rtx
1475     to that one.  */
1476
1477  if (in != 0 && out != 0 && in != out && rld[i].reg_rtx == 0)
1478    {
1479      rld[i].reg_rtx = find_dummy_reload (in, out, inloc, outloc,
1480					  inmode, outmode,
1481					  rld[i].class, i,
1482					  earlyclobber_operand_p (out));
1483
1484      /* If the outgoing register already contains the same value
1485	 as the incoming one, we can dispense with loading it.
1486	 The easiest way to tell the caller that is to give a phony
1487	 value for the incoming operand (same as outgoing one).  */
1488      if (rld[i].reg_rtx == out
1489	  && (GET_CODE (in) == REG || CONSTANT_P (in))
1490	  && 0 != find_equiv_reg (in, this_insn, 0, REGNO (out),
1491				  static_reload_reg_p, i, inmode))
1492	rld[i].in = out;
1493    }
1494
1495  /* If this is an input reload and the operand contains a register that
1496     dies in this insn and is used nowhere else, see if it is the right class
1497     to be used for this reload.  Use it if so.  (This occurs most commonly
1498     in the case of paradoxical SUBREGs and in-out reloads).  We cannot do
1499     this if it is also an output reload that mentions the register unless
1500     the output is a SUBREG that clobbers an entire register.
1501
1502     Note that the operand might be one of the spill regs, if it is a
1503     pseudo reg and we are in a block where spilling has not taken place.
1504     But if there is no spilling in this block, that is OK.
1505     An explicitly used hard reg cannot be a spill reg.  */
1506
1507  if (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0 && in != 0)
1508    {
1509      rtx note;
1510      int regno;
1511      enum machine_mode rel_mode = inmode;
1512
1513      if (out && GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode))
1514	rel_mode = outmode;
1515
1516      for (note = REG_NOTES (this_insn); note; note = XEXP (note, 1))
1517	if (REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD
1518	    && GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG
1519	    && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1520	    && reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), in)
1521	    && ! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno,
1522					       (regno
1523						+ HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno,
1524								    rel_mode)),
1525					       PATTERN (this_insn), inloc)
1526	    /* If this is also an output reload, IN cannot be used as
1527	       the reload register if it is set in this insn unless IN
1528	       is also OUT.  */
1529	    && (out == 0 || in == out
1530		|| ! hard_reg_set_here_p (regno,
1531					  (regno
1532					   + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno,
1533							       rel_mode)),
1534					  PATTERN (this_insn)))
1535	    /* ??? Why is this code so different from the previous?
1536	       Is there any simple coherent way to describe the two together?
1537	       What's going on here.  */
1538	    && (in != out
1539		|| (GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG
1540		    && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (in)) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1))
1541			 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1542			== ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1543			     + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
1544	    /* Make sure the operand fits in the reg that dies.  */
1545	    && (GET_MODE_SIZE (rel_mode)
1546		<= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))))
1547	    && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, inmode)
1548	    && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, outmode))
1549	  {
1550	    unsigned int offs;
1551	    unsigned int nregs = MAX (HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, inmode),
1552				      HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, outmode));
1553
1554	    for (offs = 0; offs < nregs; offs++)
1555	      if (fixed_regs[regno + offs]
1556		  || ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
1557					  regno + offs))
1558		break;
1559
1560	    if (offs == nregs
1561		&& (! (refers_to_regno_for_reload_p
1562		       (regno, (regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, inmode)),
1563				in, (rtx *)0))
1564		    || can_reload_into (in, regno, inmode)))
1565	      {
1566		rld[i].reg_rtx = gen_rtx_REG (rel_mode, regno);
1567		break;
1568	      }
1569	  }
1570    }
1571
1572  if (out)
1573    output_reloadnum = i;
1574
1575  return i;
1576}
1577
1578/* Record an additional place we must replace a value
1579   for which we have already recorded a reload.
1580   RELOADNUM is the value returned by push_reload
1581   when the reload was recorded.
1582   This is used in insn patterns that use match_dup.  */
1583
1584static void
1585push_replacement (rtx *loc, int reloadnum, enum machine_mode mode)
1586{
1587  if (replace_reloads)
1588    {
1589      struct replacement *r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
1590      r->what = reloadnum;
1591      r->where = loc;
1592      r->subreg_loc = 0;
1593      r->mode = mode;
1594    }
1595}
1596
1597/* Duplicate any replacement we have recorded to apply at
1598   location ORIG_LOC to also be performed at DUP_LOC.
1599   This is used in insn patterns that use match_dup.  */
1600
1601static void
1602dup_replacements (rtx *dup_loc, rtx *orig_loc)
1603{
1604  int i, n = n_replacements;
1605
1606  for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
1607    {
1608      struct replacement *r = &replacements[i];
1609      if (r->where == orig_loc)
1610	push_replacement (dup_loc, r->what, r->mode);
1611    }
1612}
1613
1614/* Transfer all replacements that used to be in reload FROM to be in
1615   reload TO.  */
1616
1617void
1618transfer_replacements (int to, int from)
1619{
1620  int i;
1621
1622  for (i = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
1623    if (replacements[i].what == from)
1624      replacements[i].what = to;
1625}
1626
1627/* IN_RTX is the value loaded by a reload that we now decided to inherit,
1628   or a subpart of it.  If we have any replacements registered for IN_RTX,
1629   cancel the reloads that were supposed to load them.
1630   Return nonzero if we canceled any reloads.  */
1631int
1632remove_address_replacements (rtx in_rtx)
1633{
1634  int i, j;
1635  char reload_flags[MAX_RELOADS];
1636  int something_changed = 0;
1637
1638  memset (reload_flags, 0, sizeof reload_flags);
1639  for (i = 0, j = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
1640    {
1641      if (loc_mentioned_in_p (replacements[i].where, in_rtx))
1642	reload_flags[replacements[i].what] |= 1;
1643      else
1644	{
1645	  replacements[j++] = replacements[i];
1646	  reload_flags[replacements[i].what] |= 2;
1647	}
1648    }
1649  /* Note that the following store must be done before the recursive calls.  */
1650  n_replacements = j;
1651
1652  for (i = n_reloads - 1; i >= 0; i--)
1653    {
1654      if (reload_flags[i] == 1)
1655	{
1656	  deallocate_reload_reg (i);
1657	  remove_address_replacements (rld[i].in);
1658	  rld[i].in = 0;
1659	  something_changed = 1;
1660	}
1661    }
1662  return something_changed;
1663}
1664
1665/* If there is only one output reload, and it is not for an earlyclobber
1666   operand, try to combine it with a (logically unrelated) input reload
1667   to reduce the number of reload registers needed.
1668
1669   This is safe if the input reload does not appear in
1670   the value being output-reloaded, because this implies
1671   it is not needed any more once the original insn completes.
1672
1673   If that doesn't work, see we can use any of the registers that
1674   die in this insn as a reload register.  We can if it is of the right
1675   class and does not appear in the value being output-reloaded.  */
1676
1677static void
1678combine_reloads (void)
1679{
1680  int i;
1681  int output_reload = -1;
1682  int secondary_out = -1;
1683  rtx note;
1684
1685  /* Find the output reload; return unless there is exactly one
1686     and that one is mandatory.  */
1687
1688  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
1689    if (rld[i].out != 0)
1690      {
1691	if (output_reload >= 0)
1692	  return;
1693	output_reload = i;
1694      }
1695
1696  if (output_reload < 0 || rld[output_reload].optional)
1697    return;
1698
1699  /* An input-output reload isn't combinable.  */
1700
1701  if (rld[output_reload].in != 0)
1702    return;
1703
1704  /* If this reload is for an earlyclobber operand, we can't do anything.  */
1705  if (earlyclobber_operand_p (rld[output_reload].out))
1706    return;
1707
1708  /* If there is a reload for part of the address of this operand, we would
1709     need to chnage it to RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS.  But that would extend
1710     its life to the point where doing this combine would not lower the
1711     number of spill registers needed.  */
1712  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
1713    if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
1714	 || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
1715	&& rld[i].opnum == rld[output_reload].opnum)
1716      return;
1717
1718  /* Check each input reload; can we combine it?  */
1719
1720  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
1721    if (rld[i].in && ! rld[i].optional && ! rld[i].nocombine
1722	/* Life span of this reload must not extend past main insn.  */
1723	&& rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
1724	&& rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS
1725	&& rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_OTHER
1726	&& (CLASS_MAX_NREGS (rld[i].class, rld[i].inmode)
1727	    == CLASS_MAX_NREGS (rld[output_reload].class,
1728				rld[output_reload].outmode))
1729	&& rld[i].inc == 0
1730	&& rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
1731#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1732	/* Don't combine two reloads with different secondary
1733	   memory locations.  */
1734	&& (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[i].opnum] == 0
1735	    || secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum] == 0
1736	    || rtx_equal_p (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[i].opnum],
1737			    secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum]))
1738#endif
1739	&& (SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1740	    ? (rld[i].class == rld[output_reload].class)
1741	    : (reg_class_subset_p (rld[i].class,
1742				   rld[output_reload].class)
1743	       || reg_class_subset_p (rld[output_reload].class,
1744				      rld[i].class)))
1745	&& (MATCHES (rld[i].in, rld[output_reload].out)
1746	    /* Args reversed because the first arg seems to be
1747	       the one that we imagine being modified
1748	       while the second is the one that might be affected.  */
1749	    || (! reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (rld[output_reload].out,
1750						      rld[i].in)
1751		/* However, if the input is a register that appears inside
1752		   the output, then we also can't share.
1753		   Imagine (set (mem (reg 69)) (plus (reg 69) ...)).
1754		   If the same reload reg is used for both reg 69 and the
1755		   result to be stored in memory, then that result
1756		   will clobber the address of the memory ref.  */
1757		&& ! (GET_CODE (rld[i].in) == REG
1758		      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (rld[i].in,
1759							     rld[output_reload].out))))
1760	&& ! reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (rld[i].in, rld[i].inmode,
1761					 rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_INPUT)
1762	&& (reg_class_size[(int) rld[i].class]
1763	    || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
1764	/* We will allow making things slightly worse by combining an
1765	   input and an output, but no worse than that.  */
1766	&& (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
1767	    || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT))
1768      {
1769	int j;
1770
1771	/* We have found a reload to combine with!  */
1772	rld[i].out = rld[output_reload].out;
1773	rld[i].out_reg = rld[output_reload].out_reg;
1774	rld[i].outmode = rld[output_reload].outmode;
1775	/* Mark the old output reload as inoperative.  */
1776	rld[output_reload].out = 0;
1777	/* The combined reload is needed for the entire insn.  */
1778	rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
1779	/* If the output reload had a secondary reload, copy it.  */
1780	if (rld[output_reload].secondary_out_reload != -1)
1781	  {
1782	    rld[i].secondary_out_reload
1783	      = rld[output_reload].secondary_out_reload;
1784	    rld[i].secondary_out_icode
1785	      = rld[output_reload].secondary_out_icode;
1786	  }
1787
1788#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1789	/* Copy any secondary MEM.  */
1790	if (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum] != 0)
1791	  secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[i].opnum]
1792	    = secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum];
1793#endif
1794	/* If required, minimize the register class.  */
1795	if (reg_class_subset_p (rld[output_reload].class,
1796				rld[i].class))
1797	  rld[i].class = rld[output_reload].class;
1798
1799	/* Transfer all replacements from the old reload to the combined.  */
1800	for (j = 0; j < n_replacements; j++)
1801	  if (replacements[j].what == output_reload)
1802	    replacements[j].what = i;
1803
1804	return;
1805      }
1806
1807  /* If this insn has only one operand that is modified or written (assumed
1808     to be the first),  it must be the one corresponding to this reload.  It
1809     is safe to use anything that dies in this insn for that output provided
1810     that it does not occur in the output (we already know it isn't an
1811     earlyclobber.  If this is an asm insn, give up.  */
1812
1813  if (INSN_CODE (this_insn) == -1)
1814    return;
1815
1816  for (i = 1; i < insn_data[INSN_CODE (this_insn)].n_operands; i++)
1817    if (insn_data[INSN_CODE (this_insn)].operand[i].constraint[0] == '='
1818	|| insn_data[INSN_CODE (this_insn)].operand[i].constraint[0] == '+')
1819      return;
1820
1821  /* See if some hard register that dies in this insn and is not used in
1822     the output is the right class.  Only works if the register we pick
1823     up can fully hold our output reload.  */
1824  for (note = REG_NOTES (this_insn); note; note = XEXP (note, 1))
1825    if (REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD
1826	&& GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG
1827	&& ! reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (note, 0),
1828						 rld[output_reload].out)
1829	&& REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1830	&& HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)), rld[output_reload].outmode)
1831	&& TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) rld[output_reload].class],
1832			      REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
1833	&& (HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)), rld[output_reload].outmode)
1834	    <= HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)), GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))))
1835	/* Ensure that a secondary or tertiary reload for this output
1836	   won't want this register.  */
1837	&& ((secondary_out = rld[output_reload].secondary_out_reload) == -1
1838	    || (! (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT
1839		   (reg_class_contents[(int) rld[secondary_out].class],
1840		    REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))))
1841		&& ((secondary_out = rld[secondary_out].secondary_out_reload) == -1
1842		    ||  ! (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT
1843			   (reg_class_contents[(int) rld[secondary_out].class],
1844			    REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))))))
1845	&& ! fixed_regs[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))])
1846      {
1847	rld[output_reload].reg_rtx
1848	  = gen_rtx_REG (rld[output_reload].outmode,
1849			 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)));
1850	return;
1851      }
1852}
1853
1854/* Try to find a reload register for an in-out reload (expressions IN and OUT).
1855   See if one of IN and OUT is a register that may be used;
1856   this is desirable since a spill-register won't be needed.
1857   If so, return the register rtx that proves acceptable.
1858
1859   INLOC and OUTLOC are locations where IN and OUT appear in the insn.
1860   CLASS is the register class required for the reload.
1861
1862   If FOR_REAL is >= 0, it is the number of the reload,
1863   and in some cases when it can be discovered that OUT doesn't need
1864   to be computed, clear out rld[FOR_REAL].out.
1865
1866   If FOR_REAL is -1, this should not be done, because this call
1867   is just to see if a register can be found, not to find and install it.
1868
1869   EARLYCLOBBER is nonzero if OUT is an earlyclobber operand.  This
1870   puts an additional constraint on being able to use IN for OUT since
1871   IN must not appear elsewhere in the insn (it is assumed that IN itself
1872   is safe from the earlyclobber).  */
1873
1874static rtx
1875find_dummy_reload (rtx real_in, rtx real_out, rtx *inloc, rtx *outloc,
1876		   enum machine_mode inmode, enum machine_mode outmode,
1877		   enum reg_class class, int for_real, int earlyclobber)
1878{
1879  rtx in = real_in;
1880  rtx out = real_out;
1881  int in_offset = 0;
1882  int out_offset = 0;
1883  rtx value = 0;
1884
1885  /* If operands exceed a word, we can't use either of them
1886     unless they have the same size.  */
1887  if (GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) != GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1888      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
1889	  || GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD))
1890    return 0;
1891
1892  /* Note that {in,out}_offset are needed only when 'in' or 'out'
1893     respectively refers to a hard register.  */
1894
1895  /* Find the inside of any subregs.  */
1896  while (GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG)
1897    {
1898      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1899	  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1900	out_offset += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1901					   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1902					   SUBREG_BYTE (out),
1903					   GET_MODE (out));
1904      out = SUBREG_REG (out);
1905    }
1906  while (GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG)
1907    {
1908      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1909	  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1910	in_offset += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1911					  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1912					  SUBREG_BYTE (in),
1913					  GET_MODE (in));
1914      in = SUBREG_REG (in);
1915    }
1916
1917  /* Narrow down the reg class, the same way push_reload will;
1918     otherwise we might find a dummy now, but push_reload won't.  */
1919  class = PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (in, class);
1920
1921  /* See if OUT will do.  */
1922  if (GET_CODE (out) == REG
1923      && REGNO (out) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1924    {
1925      unsigned int regno = REGNO (out) + out_offset;
1926      unsigned int nwords = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, outmode);
1927      rtx saved_rtx;
1928
1929      /* When we consider whether the insn uses OUT,
1930	 ignore references within IN.  They don't prevent us
1931	 from copying IN into OUT, because those refs would
1932	 move into the insn that reloads IN.
1933
1934	 However, we only ignore IN in its role as this reload.
1935	 If the insn uses IN elsewhere and it contains OUT,
1936	 that counts.  We can't be sure it's the "same" operand
1937	 so it might not go through this reload.  */
1938      saved_rtx = *inloc;
1939      *inloc = const0_rtx;
1940
1941      if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1942	  && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, outmode)
1943	  && ! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, regno + nwords,
1944					     PATTERN (this_insn), outloc))
1945	{
1946	  unsigned int i;
1947
1948	  for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
1949	    if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
1950				     regno + i))
1951	      break;
1952
1953	  if (i == nwords)
1954	    {
1955	      if (GET_CODE (real_out) == REG)
1956		value = real_out;
1957	      else
1958		value = gen_rtx_REG (outmode, regno);
1959	    }
1960	}
1961
1962      *inloc = saved_rtx;
1963    }
1964
1965  /* Consider using IN if OUT was not acceptable
1966     or if OUT dies in this insn (like the quotient in a divmod insn).
1967     We can't use IN unless it is dies in this insn,
1968     which means we must know accurately which hard regs are live.
1969     Also, the result can't go in IN if IN is used within OUT,
1970     or if OUT is an earlyclobber and IN appears elsewhere in the insn.  */
1971  if (hard_regs_live_known
1972      && GET_CODE (in) == REG
1973      && REGNO (in) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1974      && (value == 0
1975	  || find_reg_note (this_insn, REG_UNUSED, real_out))
1976      && find_reg_note (this_insn, REG_DEAD, real_in)
1977      && !fixed_regs[REGNO (in)]
1978      && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (in),
1979			     /* The only case where out and real_out might
1980				have different modes is where real_out
1981				is a subreg, and in that case, out
1982				has a real mode.  */
1983			     (GET_MODE (out) != VOIDmode
1984			      ? GET_MODE (out) : outmode)))
1985    {
1986      unsigned int regno = REGNO (in) + in_offset;
1987      unsigned int nwords = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, inmode);
1988
1989      if (! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, regno + nwords, out, (rtx*) 0)
1990	  && ! hard_reg_set_here_p (regno, regno + nwords,
1991				    PATTERN (this_insn))
1992	  && (! earlyclobber
1993	      || ! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, regno + nwords,
1994						 PATTERN (this_insn), inloc)))
1995	{
1996	  unsigned int i;
1997
1998	  for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
1999	    if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
2000				     regno + i))
2001	      break;
2002
2003	  if (i == nwords)
2004	    {
2005	      /* If we were going to use OUT as the reload reg
2006		 and changed our mind, it means OUT is a dummy that
2007		 dies here.  So don't bother copying value to it.  */
2008	      if (for_real >= 0 && value == real_out)
2009		rld[for_real].out = 0;
2010	      if (GET_CODE (real_in) == REG)
2011		value = real_in;
2012	      else
2013		value = gen_rtx_REG (inmode, regno);
2014	    }
2015	}
2016    }
2017
2018  return value;
2019}
2020
2021/* This page contains subroutines used mainly for determining
2022   whether the IN or an OUT of a reload can serve as the
2023   reload register.  */
2024
2025/* Return 1 if X is an operand of an insn that is being earlyclobbered.  */
2026
2027int
2028earlyclobber_operand_p (rtx x)
2029{
2030  int i;
2031
2032  for (i = 0; i < n_earlyclobbers; i++)
2033    if (reload_earlyclobbers[i] == x)
2034      return 1;
2035
2036  return 0;
2037}
2038
2039/* Return 1 if expression X alters a hard reg in the range
2040   from BEG_REGNO (inclusive) to END_REGNO (exclusive),
2041   either explicitly or in the guise of a pseudo-reg allocated to REGNO.
2042   X should be the body of an instruction.  */
2043
2044static int
2045hard_reg_set_here_p (unsigned int beg_regno, unsigned int end_regno, rtx x)
2046{
2047  if (GET_CODE (x) == SET || GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
2048    {
2049      rtx op0 = SET_DEST (x);
2050
2051      while (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
2052	op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
2053      if (GET_CODE (op0) == REG)
2054	{
2055	  unsigned int r = REGNO (op0);
2056
2057	  /* See if this reg overlaps range under consideration.  */
2058	  if (r < end_regno
2059	      && r + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (r, GET_MODE (op0)) > beg_regno)
2060	    return 1;
2061	}
2062    }
2063  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
2064    {
2065      int i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1;
2066
2067      for (; i >= 0; i--)
2068	if (hard_reg_set_here_p (beg_regno, end_regno, XVECEXP (x, 0, i)))
2069	  return 1;
2070    }
2071
2072  return 0;
2073}
2074
2075/* Return 1 if ADDR is a valid memory address for mode MODE,
2076   and check that each pseudo reg has the proper kind of
2077   hard reg.  */
2078
2079int
2080strict_memory_address_p (enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx addr)
2081{
2082  GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (mode, addr, win);
2083  return 0;
2084
2085 win:
2086  return 1;
2087}
2088
2089/* Like rtx_equal_p except that it allows a REG and a SUBREG to match
2090   if they are the same hard reg, and has special hacks for
2091   autoincrement and autodecrement.
2092   This is specifically intended for find_reloads to use
2093   in determining whether two operands match.
2094   X is the operand whose number is the lower of the two.
2095
2096   The value is 2 if Y contains a pre-increment that matches
2097   a non-incrementing address in X.  */
2098
2099/* ??? To be completely correct, we should arrange to pass
2100   for X the output operand and for Y the input operand.
2101   For now, we assume that the output operand has the lower number
2102   because that is natural in (SET output (... input ...)).  */
2103
2104int
2105operands_match_p (rtx x, rtx y)
2106{
2107  int i;
2108  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
2109  const char *fmt;
2110  int success_2;
2111
2112  if (x == y)
2113    return 1;
2114  if ((code == REG || (code == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG))
2115      && (GET_CODE (y) == REG || (GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG
2116				  && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (y)) == REG)))
2117    {
2118      int j;
2119
2120      if (code == SUBREG)
2121	{
2122	  i = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
2123	  if (i >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2124	    goto slow;
2125	  i += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)),
2126				    GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
2127				    SUBREG_BYTE (x),
2128				    GET_MODE (x));
2129	}
2130      else
2131	i = REGNO (x);
2132
2133      if (GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG)
2134	{
2135	  j = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (y));
2136	  if (j >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2137	    goto slow;
2138	  j += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (y)),
2139				    GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (y)),
2140				    SUBREG_BYTE (y),
2141				    GET_MODE (y));
2142	}
2143      else
2144	j = REGNO (y);
2145
2146      /* On a WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN machine, point to the last register of a
2147	 multiple hard register group, so that for example (reg:DI 0) and
2148	 (reg:SI 1) will be considered the same register.  */
2149      if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) > UNITS_PER_WORD
2150	  && i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2151	i += HARD_REGNO_NREGS (i, GET_MODE (x)) - 1;
2152      if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (y)) > UNITS_PER_WORD
2153	  && j < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2154	j += HARD_REGNO_NREGS (j, GET_MODE (y)) - 1;
2155
2156      return i == j;
2157    }
2158  /* If two operands must match, because they are really a single
2159     operand of an assembler insn, then two postincrements are invalid
2160     because the assembler insn would increment only once.
2161     On the other hand, a postincrement matches ordinary indexing
2162     if the postincrement is the output operand.  */
2163  if (code == POST_DEC || code == POST_INC || code == POST_MODIFY)
2164    return operands_match_p (XEXP (x, 0), y);
2165  /* Two preincrements are invalid
2166     because the assembler insn would increment only once.
2167     On the other hand, a preincrement matches ordinary indexing
2168     if the preincrement is the input operand.
2169     In this case, return 2, since some callers need to do special
2170     things when this happens.  */
2171  if (GET_CODE (y) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (y) == PRE_INC
2172      || GET_CODE (y) == PRE_MODIFY)
2173    return operands_match_p (x, XEXP (y, 0)) ? 2 : 0;
2174
2175 slow:
2176
2177  /* Now we have disposed of all the cases
2178     in which different rtx codes can match.  */
2179  if (code != GET_CODE (y))
2180    return 0;
2181  if (code == LABEL_REF)
2182    return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2183  if (code == SYMBOL_REF)
2184    return XSTR (x, 0) == XSTR (y, 0);
2185
2186  /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent.  */
2187
2188  if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
2189    return 0;
2190
2191  /* Compare the elements.  If any pair of corresponding elements
2192     fail to match, return 0 for the whole things.  */
2193
2194  success_2 = 0;
2195  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2196  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2197    {
2198      int val, j;
2199      switch (fmt[i])
2200	{
2201	case 'w':
2202	  if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2203	    return 0;
2204	  break;
2205
2206	case 'i':
2207	  if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2208	    return 0;
2209	  break;
2210
2211	case 'e':
2212	  val = operands_match_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i));
2213	  if (val == 0)
2214	    return 0;
2215	  /* If any subexpression returns 2,
2216	     we should return 2 if we are successful.  */
2217	  if (val == 2)
2218	    success_2 = 1;
2219	  break;
2220
2221	case '0':
2222	  break;
2223
2224	case 'E':
2225	  if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2226	    return 0;
2227	  for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; --j)
2228	    {
2229	      val = operands_match_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j));
2230	      if (val == 0)
2231		return 0;
2232	      if (val == 2)
2233		success_2 = 1;
2234	    }
2235	  break;
2236
2237	  /* It is believed that rtx's at this level will never
2238	     contain anything but integers and other rtx's,
2239	     except for within LABEL_REFs and SYMBOL_REFs.  */
2240	default:
2241	  abort ();
2242	}
2243    }
2244  return 1 + success_2;
2245}
2246
2247/* Describe the range of registers or memory referenced by X.
2248   If X is a register, set REG_FLAG and put the first register
2249   number into START and the last plus one into END.
2250   If X is a memory reference, put a base address into BASE
2251   and a range of integer offsets into START and END.
2252   If X is pushing on the stack, we can assume it causes no trouble,
2253   so we set the SAFE field.  */
2254
2255static struct decomposition
2256decompose (rtx x)
2257{
2258  struct decomposition val;
2259  int all_const = 0;
2260
2261  val.reg_flag = 0;
2262  val.safe = 0;
2263  val.base = 0;
2264  if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
2265    {
2266      rtx base = NULL_RTX, offset = 0;
2267      rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0);
2268
2269      if (GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
2270	  || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
2271	{
2272	  val.base = XEXP (addr, 0);
2273	  val.start = -GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2274	  val.end = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2275	  val.safe = REGNO (val.base) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM;
2276	  return val;
2277	}
2278
2279      if (GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_MODIFY || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_MODIFY)
2280	{
2281	  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == PLUS
2282	      && XEXP (addr, 0) == XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 0)
2283	      && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1)))
2284	    {
2285	      val.base  = XEXP (addr, 0);
2286	      val.start = -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1));
2287	      val.end   = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1));
2288	      val.safe  = REGNO (val.base) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM;
2289	      return val;
2290	    }
2291	}
2292
2293      if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
2294	{
2295	  addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
2296	  all_const = 1;
2297	}
2298      if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
2299	{
2300	  if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (addr, 0)))
2301	    {
2302	      base = XEXP (addr, 1);
2303	      offset = XEXP (addr, 0);
2304	    }
2305	  else if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (addr, 1)))
2306	    {
2307	      base = XEXP (addr, 0);
2308	      offset = XEXP (addr, 1);
2309	    }
2310	}
2311
2312      if (offset == 0)
2313	{
2314	  base = addr;
2315	  offset = const0_rtx;
2316	}
2317      if (GET_CODE (offset) == CONST)
2318	offset = XEXP (offset, 0);
2319      if (GET_CODE (offset) == PLUS)
2320	{
2321	  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (offset, 0)) == CONST_INT)
2322	    {
2323	      base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, XEXP (offset, 1));
2324	      offset = XEXP (offset, 0);
2325	    }
2326	  else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (offset, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2327	    {
2328	      base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, XEXP (offset, 0));
2329	      offset = XEXP (offset, 1);
2330	    }
2331	  else
2332	    {
2333	      base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, offset);
2334	      offset = const0_rtx;
2335	    }
2336	}
2337      else if (GET_CODE (offset) != CONST_INT)
2338	{
2339	  base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, offset);
2340	  offset = const0_rtx;
2341	}
2342
2343      if (all_const && GET_CODE (base) == PLUS)
2344	base = gen_rtx_CONST (GET_MODE (base), base);
2345
2346      if (GET_CODE (offset) != CONST_INT)
2347	abort ();
2348
2349      val.start = INTVAL (offset);
2350      val.end = val.start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2351      val.base = base;
2352      return val;
2353    }
2354  else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
2355    {
2356      val.reg_flag = 1;
2357      val.start = true_regnum (x);
2358      if (val.start < 0)
2359	{
2360	  /* A pseudo with no hard reg.  */
2361	  val.start = REGNO (x);
2362	  val.end = val.start + 1;
2363	}
2364      else
2365	/* A hard reg.  */
2366	val.end = val.start + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (val.start, GET_MODE (x));
2367    }
2368  else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
2369    {
2370      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
2371	/* This could be more precise, but it's good enough.  */
2372	return decompose (SUBREG_REG (x));
2373      val.reg_flag = 1;
2374      val.start = true_regnum (x);
2375      if (val.start < 0)
2376	return decompose (SUBREG_REG (x));
2377      else
2378	/* A hard reg.  */
2379	val.end = val.start + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (val.start, GET_MODE (x));
2380    }
2381  else if (CONSTANT_P (x)
2382	   /* This hasn't been assigned yet, so it can't conflict yet.  */
2383	   || GET_CODE (x) == SCRATCH)
2384    val.safe = 1;
2385  else
2386    abort ();
2387  return val;
2388}
2389
2390/* Return 1 if altering Y will not modify the value of X.
2391   Y is also described by YDATA, which should be decompose (Y).  */
2392
2393static int
2394immune_p (rtx x, rtx y, struct decomposition ydata)
2395{
2396  struct decomposition xdata;
2397
2398  if (ydata.reg_flag)
2399    return !refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (ydata.start, ydata.end, x, (rtx*) 0);
2400  if (ydata.safe)
2401    return 1;
2402
2403  if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
2404    abort ();
2405  /* If Y is memory and X is not, Y can't affect X.  */
2406  if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
2407    return 1;
2408
2409  xdata = decompose (x);
2410
2411  if (! rtx_equal_p (xdata.base, ydata.base))
2412    {
2413      /* If bases are distinct symbolic constants, there is no overlap.  */
2414      if (CONSTANT_P (xdata.base) && CONSTANT_P (ydata.base))
2415	return 1;
2416      /* Constants and stack slots never overlap.  */
2417      if (CONSTANT_P (xdata.base)
2418	  && (ydata.base == frame_pointer_rtx
2419	      || ydata.base == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
2420	      || ydata.base == stack_pointer_rtx))
2421	return 1;
2422      if (CONSTANT_P (ydata.base)
2423	  && (xdata.base == frame_pointer_rtx
2424	      || xdata.base == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
2425	      || xdata.base == stack_pointer_rtx))
2426	return 1;
2427      /* If either base is variable, we don't know anything.  */
2428      return 0;
2429    }
2430
2431  return (xdata.start >= ydata.end || ydata.start >= xdata.end);
2432}
2433
2434/* Similar, but calls decompose.  */
2435
2436int
2437safe_from_earlyclobber (rtx op, rtx clobber)
2438{
2439  struct decomposition early_data;
2440
2441  early_data = decompose (clobber);
2442  return immune_p (op, clobber, early_data);
2443}
2444
2445/* Main entry point of this file: search the body of INSN
2446   for values that need reloading and record them with push_reload.
2447   REPLACE nonzero means record also where the values occur
2448   so that subst_reloads can be used.
2449
2450   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirection are supported by this
2451   machine; a value of zero means that a memory reference is not a valid
2452   memory address.
2453
2454   LIVE_KNOWN says we have valid information about which hard
2455   regs are live at each point in the program; this is true when
2456   we are called from global_alloc but false when stupid register
2457   allocation has been done.
2458
2459   RELOAD_REG_P if nonzero is a vector indexed by hard reg number
2460   which is nonnegative if the reg has been commandeered for reloading into.
2461   It is copied into STATIC_RELOAD_REG_P and referenced from there
2462   by various subroutines.
2463
2464   Return TRUE if some operands need to be changed, because of swapping
2465   commutative operands, reg_equiv_address substitution, or whatever.  */
2466
2467int
2468find_reloads (rtx insn, int replace, int ind_levels, int live_known,
2469	      short *reload_reg_p)
2470{
2471  int insn_code_number;
2472  int i, j;
2473  int noperands;
2474  /* These start out as the constraints for the insn
2475     and they are chewed up as we consider alternatives.  */
2476  char *constraints[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2477  /* These are the preferred classes for an operand, or NO_REGS if it isn't
2478     a register.  */
2479  enum reg_class preferred_class[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2480  char pref_or_nothing[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2481  /* Nonzero for a MEM operand whose entire address needs a reload.  */
2482  int address_reloaded[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2483  /* Nonzero for an address operand that needs to be completely reloaded.  */
2484  int address_operand_reloaded[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2485  /* Value of enum reload_type to use for operand.  */
2486  enum reload_type operand_type[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2487  /* Value of enum reload_type to use within address of operand.  */
2488  enum reload_type address_type[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2489  /* Save the usage of each operand.  */
2490  enum reload_usage { RELOAD_READ, RELOAD_READ_WRITE, RELOAD_WRITE } modified[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2491  int no_input_reloads = 0, no_output_reloads = 0;
2492  int n_alternatives;
2493  int this_alternative[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2494  char this_alternative_match_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2495  char this_alternative_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2496  char this_alternative_offmemok[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2497  char this_alternative_earlyclobber[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2498  int this_alternative_matches[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2499  int swapped;
2500  int goal_alternative[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2501  int this_alternative_number;
2502  int goal_alternative_number = 0;
2503  int operand_reloadnum[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2504  int goal_alternative_matches[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2505  int goal_alternative_matched[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2506  char goal_alternative_match_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2507  char goal_alternative_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2508  char goal_alternative_offmemok[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2509  char goal_alternative_earlyclobber[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2510  int goal_alternative_swapped;
2511  int best;
2512  int commutative;
2513  char operands_match[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS][MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2514  rtx substed_operand[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2515  rtx body = PATTERN (insn);
2516  rtx set = single_set (insn);
2517  int goal_earlyclobber = 0, this_earlyclobber;
2518  enum machine_mode operand_mode[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2519  int retval = 0;
2520
2521  this_insn = insn;
2522  n_reloads = 0;
2523  n_replacements = 0;
2524  n_earlyclobbers = 0;
2525  replace_reloads = replace;
2526  hard_regs_live_known = live_known;
2527  static_reload_reg_p = reload_reg_p;
2528
2529  /* JUMP_INSNs and CALL_INSNs are not allowed to have any output reloads;
2530     neither are insns that SET cc0.  Insns that use CC0 are not allowed
2531     to have any input reloads.  */
2532  if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN || GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
2533    no_output_reloads = 1;
2534
2535#ifdef HAVE_cc0
2536  if (reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (insn)))
2537    no_input_reloads = 1;
2538  if (reg_set_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (insn)))
2539    no_output_reloads = 1;
2540#endif
2541
2542#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2543  /* The eliminated forms of any secondary memory locations are per-insn, so
2544     clear them out here.  */
2545
2546  if (secondary_memlocs_elim_used)
2547    {
2548      memset (secondary_memlocs_elim, 0,
2549	      sizeof (secondary_memlocs_elim[0]) * secondary_memlocs_elim_used);
2550      secondary_memlocs_elim_used = 0;
2551    }
2552#endif
2553
2554  /* Dispose quickly of (set (reg..) (reg..)) if both have hard regs and it
2555     is cheap to move between them.  If it is not, there may not be an insn
2556     to do the copy, so we may need a reload.  */
2557  if (GET_CODE (body) == SET
2558      && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (body)) == REG
2559      && REGNO (SET_DEST (body)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2560      && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (body)) == REG
2561      && REGNO (SET_SRC (body)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2562      && REGISTER_MOVE_COST (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (body)),
2563			     REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (SET_SRC (body))),
2564			     REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (SET_DEST (body)))) == 2)
2565    return 0;
2566
2567  extract_insn (insn);
2568
2569  noperands = reload_n_operands = recog_data.n_operands;
2570  n_alternatives = recog_data.n_alternatives;
2571
2572  /* Just return "no reloads" if insn has no operands with constraints.  */
2573  if (noperands == 0 || n_alternatives == 0)
2574    return 0;
2575
2576  insn_code_number = INSN_CODE (insn);
2577  this_insn_is_asm = insn_code_number < 0;
2578
2579  memcpy (operand_mode, recog_data.operand_mode,
2580	  noperands * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
2581  memcpy (constraints, recog_data.constraints, noperands * sizeof (char *));
2582
2583  commutative = -1;
2584
2585  /* If we will need to know, later, whether some pair of operands
2586     are the same, we must compare them now and save the result.
2587     Reloading the base and index registers will clobber them
2588     and afterward they will fail to match.  */
2589
2590  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
2591    {
2592      char *p;
2593      int c;
2594
2595      substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i];
2596      p = constraints[i];
2597
2598      modified[i] = RELOAD_READ;
2599
2600      /* Scan this operand's constraint to see if it is an output operand,
2601	 an in-out operand, is commutative, or should match another.  */
2602
2603      while ((c = *p))
2604	{
2605	  p += CONSTRAINT_LEN (c, p);
2606	  if (c == '=')
2607	    modified[i] = RELOAD_WRITE;
2608	  else if (c == '+')
2609	    modified[i] = RELOAD_READ_WRITE;
2610	  else if (c == '%')
2611	    {
2612	      /* The last operand should not be marked commutative.  */
2613	      if (i == noperands - 1)
2614		abort ();
2615
2616	      /* We currently only support one commutative pair of
2617		 operands.  Some existing asm code currently uses more
2618		 than one pair.  Previously, that would usually work,
2619		 but sometimes it would crash the compiler.  We
2620		 continue supporting that case as well as we can by
2621		 silently ignoring all but the first pair.  In the
2622		 future we may handle it correctly.  */
2623	      if (commutative < 0)
2624		commutative = i;
2625	      else if (!this_insn_is_asm)
2626		abort ();
2627	    }
2628	  else if (ISDIGIT (c))
2629	    {
2630	      c = strtoul (p - 1, &p, 10);
2631
2632	      operands_match[c][i]
2633		= operands_match_p (recog_data.operand[c],
2634				    recog_data.operand[i]);
2635
2636	      /* An operand may not match itself.  */
2637	      if (c == i)
2638		abort ();
2639
2640	      /* If C can be commuted with C+1, and C might need to match I,
2641		 then C+1 might also need to match I.  */
2642	      if (commutative >= 0)
2643		{
2644		  if (c == commutative || c == commutative + 1)
2645		    {
2646		      int other = c + (c == commutative ? 1 : -1);
2647		      operands_match[other][i]
2648			= operands_match_p (recog_data.operand[other],
2649					    recog_data.operand[i]);
2650		    }
2651		  if (i == commutative || i == commutative + 1)
2652		    {
2653		      int other = i + (i == commutative ? 1 : -1);
2654		      operands_match[c][other]
2655			= operands_match_p (recog_data.operand[c],
2656					    recog_data.operand[other]);
2657		    }
2658		  /* Note that C is supposed to be less than I.
2659		     No need to consider altering both C and I because in
2660		     that case we would alter one into the other.  */
2661		}
2662	    }
2663	}
2664    }
2665
2666  /* Examine each operand that is a memory reference or memory address
2667     and reload parts of the addresses into index registers.
2668     Also here any references to pseudo regs that didn't get hard regs
2669     but are equivalent to constants get replaced in the insn itself
2670     with those constants.  Nobody will ever see them again.
2671
2672     Finally, set up the preferred classes of each operand.  */
2673
2674  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
2675    {
2676      RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2677
2678      address_reloaded[i] = 0;
2679      address_operand_reloaded[i] = 0;
2680      operand_type[i] = (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
2681			 : modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT
2682			 : RELOAD_OTHER);
2683      address_type[i]
2684	= (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
2685	   : modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
2686	   : RELOAD_OTHER);
2687
2688      if (*constraints[i] == 0)
2689	/* Ignore things like match_operator operands.  */
2690	;
2691      else if (constraints[i][0] == 'p'
2692	       || EXTRA_ADDRESS_CONSTRAINT (constraints[i][0], constraints[i]))
2693	{
2694	  address_operand_reloaded[i]
2695	    = find_reloads_address (recog_data.operand_mode[i], (rtx*) 0,
2696				    recog_data.operand[i],
2697				    recog_data.operand_loc[i],
2698				    i, operand_type[i], ind_levels, insn);
2699
2700	  /* If we now have a simple operand where we used to have a
2701	     PLUS or MULT, re-recognize and try again.  */
2702	  if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*recog_data.operand_loc[i])) == 'o'
2703	       || GET_CODE (*recog_data.operand_loc[i]) == SUBREG)
2704	      && (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == MULT
2705		  || GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == PLUS))
2706	    {
2707	      INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
2708	      retval = find_reloads (insn, replace, ind_levels, live_known,
2709				     reload_reg_p);
2710	      return retval;
2711	    }
2712
2713	  recog_data.operand[i] = *recog_data.operand_loc[i];
2714	  substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i];
2715
2716	  /* Address operands are reloaded in their existing mode,
2717	     no matter what is specified in the machine description.  */
2718	  operand_mode[i] = GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2719	}
2720      else if (code == MEM)
2721	{
2722	  address_reloaded[i]
2723	    = find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]),
2724				    recog_data.operand_loc[i],
2725				    XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0),
2726				    &XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0),
2727				    i, address_type[i], ind_levels, insn);
2728	  recog_data.operand[i] = *recog_data.operand_loc[i];
2729	  substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i];
2730	}
2731      else if (code == SUBREG)
2732	{
2733	  rtx reg = SUBREG_REG (recog_data.operand[i]);
2734	  rtx op
2735	    = find_reloads_toplev (recog_data.operand[i], i, address_type[i],
2736				   ind_levels,
2737				   set != 0
2738				   && &SET_DEST (set) == recog_data.operand_loc[i],
2739				   insn,
2740				   &address_reloaded[i]);
2741
2742	  /* If we made a MEM to load (a part of) the stackslot of a pseudo
2743	     that didn't get a hard register, emit a USE with a REG_EQUAL
2744	     note in front so that we might inherit a previous, possibly
2745	     wider reload.  */
2746
2747	  if (replace
2748	      && GET_CODE (op) == MEM
2749	      && GET_CODE (reg) == REG
2750	      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (reg))
2751		  >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op))))
2752	    set_unique_reg_note (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, reg),
2753						   insn),
2754				 REG_EQUAL, reg_equiv_memory_loc[REGNO (reg)]);
2755
2756	  substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i] = op;
2757	}
2758      else if (code == PLUS || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '1')
2759	/* We can get a PLUS as an "operand" as a result of register
2760	   elimination.  See eliminate_regs and gen_reload.  We handle
2761	   a unary operator by reloading the operand.  */
2762	substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
2763	  = find_reloads_toplev (recog_data.operand[i], i, address_type[i],
2764				 ind_levels, 0, insn,
2765				 &address_reloaded[i]);
2766      else if (code == REG)
2767	{
2768	  /* This is equivalent to calling find_reloads_toplev.
2769	     The code is duplicated for speed.
2770	     When we find a pseudo always equivalent to a constant,
2771	     we replace it by the constant.  We must be sure, however,
2772	     that we don't try to replace it in the insn in which it
2773	     is being set.  */
2774	  int regno = REGNO (recog_data.operand[i]);
2775	  if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0
2776	      && (set == 0 || &SET_DEST (set) != recog_data.operand_loc[i]))
2777	    {
2778	      /* Record the existing mode so that the check if constants are
2779		 allowed will work when operand_mode isn't specified.  */
2780
2781	      if (operand_mode[i] == VOIDmode)
2782		operand_mode[i] = GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2783
2784	      substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
2785		= reg_equiv_constant[regno];
2786	    }
2787	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0
2788	      && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
2789	    /* We need not give a valid is_set_dest argument since the case
2790	       of a constant equivalence was checked above.  */
2791	    substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
2792	      = find_reloads_toplev (recog_data.operand[i], i, address_type[i],
2793				     ind_levels, 0, insn,
2794				     &address_reloaded[i]);
2795	}
2796      /* If the operand is still a register (we didn't replace it with an
2797	 equivalent), get the preferred class to reload it into.  */
2798      code = GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2799      preferred_class[i]
2800	= ((code == REG && REGNO (recog_data.operand[i])
2801	    >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2802	   ? reg_preferred_class (REGNO (recog_data.operand[i]))
2803	   : NO_REGS);
2804      pref_or_nothing[i]
2805	= (code == REG
2806	   && REGNO (recog_data.operand[i]) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2807	   && reg_alternate_class (REGNO (recog_data.operand[i])) == NO_REGS);
2808    }
2809
2810  /* If this is simply a copy from operand 1 to operand 0, merge the
2811     preferred classes for the operands.  */
2812  if (set != 0 && noperands >= 2 && recog_data.operand[0] == SET_DEST (set)
2813      && recog_data.operand[1] == SET_SRC (set))
2814    {
2815      preferred_class[0] = preferred_class[1]
2816	= reg_class_subunion[(int) preferred_class[0]][(int) preferred_class[1]];
2817      pref_or_nothing[0] |= pref_or_nothing[1];
2818      pref_or_nothing[1] |= pref_or_nothing[0];
2819    }
2820
2821  /* Now see what we need for pseudo-regs that didn't get hard regs
2822     or got the wrong kind of hard reg.  For this, we must consider
2823     all the operands together against the register constraints.  */
2824
2825  best = MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS * 2 + 600;
2826
2827  swapped = 0;
2828  goal_alternative_swapped = 0;
2829 try_swapped:
2830
2831  /* The constraints are made of several alternatives.
2832     Each operand's constraint looks like foo,bar,... with commas
2833     separating the alternatives.  The first alternatives for all
2834     operands go together, the second alternatives go together, etc.
2835
2836     First loop over alternatives.  */
2837
2838  for (this_alternative_number = 0;
2839       this_alternative_number < n_alternatives;
2840       this_alternative_number++)
2841    {
2842      /* Loop over operands for one constraint alternative.  */
2843      /* LOSERS counts those that don't fit this alternative
2844	 and would require loading.  */
2845      int losers = 0;
2846      /* BAD is set to 1 if it some operand can't fit this alternative
2847	 even after reloading.  */
2848      int bad = 0;
2849      /* REJECT is a count of how undesirable this alternative says it is
2850	 if any reloading is required.  If the alternative matches exactly
2851	 then REJECT is ignored, but otherwise it gets this much
2852	 counted against it in addition to the reloading needed.  Each
2853	 ? counts three times here since we want the disparaging caused by
2854	 a bad register class to only count 1/3 as much.  */
2855      int reject = 0;
2856
2857      this_earlyclobber = 0;
2858
2859      for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
2860	{
2861	  char *p = constraints[i];
2862	  char *end;
2863	  int len;
2864	  int win = 0;
2865	  int did_match = 0;
2866	  /* 0 => this operand can be reloaded somehow for this alternative.  */
2867	  int badop = 1;
2868	  /* 0 => this operand can be reloaded if the alternative allows regs.  */
2869	  int winreg = 0;
2870	  int c;
2871	  int m;
2872	  rtx operand = recog_data.operand[i];
2873	  int offset = 0;
2874	  /* Nonzero means this is a MEM that must be reloaded into a reg
2875	     regardless of what the constraint says.  */
2876	  int force_reload = 0;
2877	  int offmemok = 0;
2878	  /* Nonzero if a constant forced into memory would be OK for this
2879	     operand.  */
2880	  int constmemok = 0;
2881	  int earlyclobber = 0;
2882
2883	  /* If the predicate accepts a unary operator, it means that
2884	     we need to reload the operand, but do not do this for
2885	     match_operator and friends.  */
2886	  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (operand)) == '1' && *p != 0)
2887	    operand = XEXP (operand, 0);
2888
2889	  /* If the operand is a SUBREG, extract
2890	     the REG or MEM (or maybe even a constant) within.
2891	     (Constants can occur as a result of reg_equiv_constant.)  */
2892
2893	  while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
2894	    {
2895	      /* Offset only matters when operand is a REG and
2896		 it is a hard reg.  This is because it is passed
2897		 to reg_fits_class_p if it is a REG and all pseudos
2898		 return 0 from that function.  */
2899	      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (operand)) == REG
2900		  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (operand)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2901		{
2902		  if (!subreg_offset_representable_p
2903			(REGNO (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2904			 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2905			 SUBREG_BYTE (operand),
2906			 GET_MODE (operand)))
2907		     force_reload = 1;
2908		  offset += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2909						 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2910						 SUBREG_BYTE (operand),
2911						 GET_MODE (operand));
2912		}
2913	      operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
2914	      /* Force reload if this is a constant or PLUS or if there may
2915		 be a problem accessing OPERAND in the outer mode.  */
2916	      if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
2917		  || GET_CODE (operand) == PLUS
2918		  /* We must force a reload of paradoxical SUBREGs
2919		     of a MEM because the alignment of the inner value
2920		     may not be enough to do the outer reference.  On
2921		     big-endian machines, it may also reference outside
2922		     the object.
2923
2924		     On machines that extend byte operations and we have a
2925		     SUBREG where both the inner and outer modes are no wider
2926		     than a word and the inner mode is narrower, is integral,
2927		     and gets extended when loaded from memory, combine.c has
2928		     made assumptions about the behavior of the machine in such
2929		     register access.  If the data is, in fact, in memory we
2930		     must always load using the size assumed to be in the
2931		     register and let the insn do the different-sized
2932		     accesses.
2933
2934		     This is doubly true if WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS.  In
2935		     this case eliminate_regs has left non-paradoxical
2936		     subregs for push_reload to see.  Make sure it does
2937		     by forcing the reload.
2938
2939		     ??? When is it right at this stage to have a subreg
2940		     of a mem that is _not_ to be handled specially?  IMO
2941		     those should have been reduced to just a mem.  */
2942		  || ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
2943		       || (GET_CODE (operand)== REG
2944			   && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2945#ifndef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
2946		      && (((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (operand))
2947			    < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
2948			   && (GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i])
2949			       > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (operand))))
2950			  || BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
2951#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
2952			  || (GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i]) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
2953			      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (operand))
2954				  <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
2955			      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i])
2956				  > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (operand)))
2957			      && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (operand))
2958			      && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (operand)) != NIL)
2959#endif
2960			  )
2961#endif
2962		      )
2963		  )
2964		force_reload = 1;
2965	    }
2966
2967	  this_alternative[i] = (int) NO_REGS;
2968	  this_alternative_win[i] = 0;
2969	  this_alternative_match_win[i] = 0;
2970	  this_alternative_offmemok[i] = 0;
2971	  this_alternative_earlyclobber[i] = 0;
2972	  this_alternative_matches[i] = -1;
2973
2974	  /* An empty constraint or empty alternative
2975	     allows anything which matched the pattern.  */
2976	  if (*p == 0 || *p == ',')
2977	    win = 1, badop = 0;
2978
2979	  /* Scan this alternative's specs for this operand;
2980	     set WIN if the operand fits any letter in this alternative.
2981	     Otherwise, clear BADOP if this operand could
2982	     fit some letter after reloads,
2983	     or set WINREG if this operand could fit after reloads
2984	     provided the constraint allows some registers.  */
2985
2986	  do
2987	    switch ((c = *p, len = CONSTRAINT_LEN (c, p)), c)
2988	      {
2989	      case '\0':
2990		len = 0;
2991		break;
2992	      case ',':
2993		c = '\0';
2994		break;
2995
2996	      case '=':  case '+':  case '*':
2997		break;
2998
2999	      case '%':
3000		/* We only support one commutative marker, the first
3001		   one.  We already set commutative above.  */
3002		break;
3003
3004	      case '?':
3005		reject += 6;
3006		break;
3007
3008	      case '!':
3009		reject = 600;
3010		break;
3011
3012	      case '#':
3013		/* Ignore rest of this alternative as far as
3014		   reloading is concerned.  */
3015		do
3016		  p++;
3017		while (*p && *p != ',');
3018		len = 0;
3019		break;
3020
3021	      case '0':  case '1':  case '2':  case '3':  case '4':
3022	      case '5':  case '6':  case '7':  case '8':  case '9':
3023		m = strtoul (p, &end, 10);
3024		p = end;
3025		len = 0;
3026
3027		this_alternative_matches[i] = m;
3028		/* We are supposed to match a previous operand.
3029		   If we do, we win if that one did.
3030		   If we do not, count both of the operands as losers.
3031		   (This is too conservative, since most of the time
3032		   only a single reload insn will be needed to make
3033		   the two operands win.  As a result, this alternative
3034		   may be rejected when it is actually desirable.)  */
3035		if ((swapped && (m != commutative || i != commutative + 1))
3036		    /* If we are matching as if two operands were swapped,
3037		       also pretend that operands_match had been computed
3038		       with swapped.
3039		       But if I is the second of those and C is the first,
3040		       don't exchange them, because operands_match is valid
3041		       only on one side of its diagonal.  */
3042		    ? (operands_match
3043		       [(m == commutative || m == commutative + 1)
3044		       ? 2 * commutative + 1 - m : m]
3045		       [(i == commutative || i == commutative + 1)
3046		       ? 2 * commutative + 1 - i : i])
3047		    : operands_match[m][i])
3048		  {
3049		    /* If we are matching a non-offsettable address where an
3050		       offsettable address was expected, then we must reject
3051		       this combination, because we can't reload it.  */
3052		    if (this_alternative_offmemok[m]
3053			&& GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[m]) == MEM
3054			&& this_alternative[m] == (int) NO_REGS
3055			&& ! this_alternative_win[m])
3056		      bad = 1;
3057
3058		    did_match = this_alternative_win[m];
3059		  }
3060		else
3061		  {
3062		    /* Operands don't match.  */
3063		    rtx value;
3064		    /* Retroactively mark the operand we had to match
3065		       as a loser, if it wasn't already.  */
3066		    if (this_alternative_win[m])
3067		      losers++;
3068		    this_alternative_win[m] = 0;
3069		    if (this_alternative[m] == (int) NO_REGS)
3070		      bad = 1;
3071		    /* But count the pair only once in the total badness of
3072		       this alternative, if the pair can be a dummy reload.  */
3073		    value
3074		      = find_dummy_reload (recog_data.operand[i],
3075					   recog_data.operand[m],
3076					   recog_data.operand_loc[i],
3077					   recog_data.operand_loc[m],
3078					   operand_mode[i], operand_mode[m],
3079					   this_alternative[m], -1,
3080					   this_alternative_earlyclobber[m]);
3081
3082		    if (value != 0)
3083		      losers--;
3084		  }
3085		/* This can be fixed with reloads if the operand
3086		   we are supposed to match can be fixed with reloads.  */
3087		badop = 0;
3088		this_alternative[i] = this_alternative[m];
3089
3090		/* If we have to reload this operand and some previous
3091		   operand also had to match the same thing as this
3092		   operand, we don't know how to do that.  So reject this
3093		   alternative.  */
3094		if (! did_match || force_reload)
3095		  for (j = 0; j < i; j++)
3096		    if (this_alternative_matches[j]
3097			== this_alternative_matches[i])
3098		      badop = 1;
3099		break;
3100
3101	      case 'p':
3102		/* All necessary reloads for an address_operand
3103		   were handled in find_reloads_address.  */
3104		this_alternative[i] = (int) MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (VOIDmode);
3105		win = 1;
3106		badop = 0;
3107		break;
3108
3109	      case 'm':
3110		if (force_reload)
3111		  break;
3112		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3113		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3114			&& REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3115			&& reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0))
3116		  win = 1;
3117		if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
3118		    /* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3119		    && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH)
3120		  badop = 0;
3121		constmemok = 1;
3122		break;
3123
3124	      case '<':
3125		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3126		    && ! address_reloaded[i]
3127		    && (GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == PRE_DEC
3128			|| GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == POST_DEC))
3129		  win = 1;
3130		break;
3131
3132	      case '>':
3133		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3134		    && ! address_reloaded[i]
3135		    && (GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == PRE_INC
3136			|| GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == POST_INC))
3137		  win = 1;
3138		break;
3139
3140		/* Memory operand whose address is not offsettable.  */
3141	      case 'V':
3142		if (force_reload)
3143		  break;
3144		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3145		    && ! (ind_levels ? offsettable_memref_p (operand)
3146			  : offsettable_nonstrict_memref_p (operand))
3147		    /* Certain mem addresses will become offsettable
3148		       after they themselves are reloaded.  This is important;
3149		       we don't want our own handling of unoffsettables
3150		       to override the handling of reg_equiv_address.  */
3151		    && !(GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == REG
3152			 && (ind_levels == 0
3153			     || reg_equiv_address[REGNO (XEXP (operand, 0))] != 0)))
3154		  win = 1;
3155		break;
3156
3157		/* Memory operand whose address is offsettable.  */
3158	      case 'o':
3159		if (force_reload)
3160		  break;
3161		if ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3162		     /* If IND_LEVELS, find_reloads_address won't reload a
3163			pseudo that didn't get a hard reg, so we have to
3164			reject that case.  */
3165		     && ((ind_levels ? offsettable_memref_p (operand)
3166			  : offsettable_nonstrict_memref_p (operand))
3167			 /* A reloaded address is offsettable because it is now
3168			    just a simple register indirect.  */
3169			 || address_reloaded[i]))
3170		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3171			&& REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3172			&& reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0
3173			/* If reg_equiv_address is nonzero, we will be
3174			   loading it into a register; hence it will be
3175			   offsettable, but we cannot say that reg_equiv_mem
3176			   is offsettable without checking.  */
3177			&& ((reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)] != 0
3178			     && offsettable_memref_p (reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)]))
3179			    || (reg_equiv_address[REGNO (operand)] != 0))))
3180		  win = 1;
3181		/* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3182		if ((CONSTANT_P (operand) && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH)
3183		    || GET_CODE (operand) == MEM)
3184		  badop = 0;
3185		constmemok = 1;
3186		offmemok = 1;
3187		break;
3188
3189	      case '&':
3190		/* Output operand that is stored before the need for the
3191		   input operands (and their index registers) is over.  */
3192		earlyclobber = 1, this_earlyclobber = 1;
3193		break;
3194
3195	      case 'E':
3196	      case 'F':
3197		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3198		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_VECTOR
3199			&& (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (operand))
3200			    == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT)))
3201		  win = 1;
3202		break;
3203
3204	      case 'G':
3205	      case 'H':
3206		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3207		    && CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P (operand, c, p))
3208		  win = 1;
3209		break;
3210
3211	      case 's':
3212		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_INT
3213		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3214			&& GET_MODE (operand) == VOIDmode))
3215		  break;
3216	      case 'i':
3217		if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
3218#ifdef LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
3219		    && (! flag_pic || LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (operand))
3220#endif
3221		    )
3222		  win = 1;
3223		break;
3224
3225	      case 'n':
3226		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_INT
3227		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3228			&& GET_MODE (operand) == VOIDmode))
3229		  win = 1;
3230		break;
3231
3232	      case 'I':
3233	      case 'J':
3234	      case 'K':
3235	      case 'L':
3236	      case 'M':
3237	      case 'N':
3238	      case 'O':
3239	      case 'P':
3240		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_INT
3241		    && CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P (INTVAL (operand), c, p))
3242		  win = 1;
3243		break;
3244
3245	      case 'X':
3246		win = 1;
3247		break;
3248
3249	      case 'g':
3250		if (! force_reload
3251		    /* A PLUS is never a valid operand, but reload can make
3252		       it from a register when eliminating registers.  */
3253		    && GET_CODE (operand) != PLUS
3254		    /* A SCRATCH is not a valid operand.  */
3255		    && GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH
3256#ifdef LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
3257		    && (! CONSTANT_P (operand)
3258			|| ! flag_pic
3259			|| LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (operand))
3260#endif
3261		    && (GENERAL_REGS == ALL_REGS
3262			|| GET_CODE (operand) != REG
3263			|| (REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3264			    && reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0)))
3265		  win = 1;
3266		/* Drop through into 'r' case.  */
3267
3268	      case 'r':
3269		this_alternative[i]
3270		  = (int) reg_class_subunion[this_alternative[i]][(int) GENERAL_REGS];
3271		goto reg;
3272
3273	      default:
3274		if (REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT (c, p) == NO_REGS)
3275		  {
3276#ifdef EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR
3277		    if (EXTRA_MEMORY_CONSTRAINT (c, p))
3278		      {
3279			if (force_reload)
3280			  break;
3281		        if (EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (operand, c, p))
3282		          win = 1;
3283			/* If the address was already reloaded,
3284			   we win as well.  */
3285			else if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3286				 && address_reloaded[i])
3287			  win = 1;
3288			/* Likewise if the address will be reloaded because
3289			   reg_equiv_address is nonzero.  For reg_equiv_mem
3290			   we have to check.  */
3291		        else if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3292				 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3293				 && reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0
3294				 && ((reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)] != 0
3295				      && EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)], c, p))
3296				     || (reg_equiv_address[REGNO (operand)] != 0)))
3297			  win = 1;
3298
3299			/* If we didn't already win, we can reload
3300			   constants via force_const_mem, and other
3301			   MEMs by reloading the address like for 'o'.  */
3302			if ((CONSTANT_P (operand) && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH)
3303			    || GET_CODE (operand) == MEM)
3304			  badop = 0;
3305			constmemok = 1;
3306			offmemok = 1;
3307			break;
3308		      }
3309		    if (EXTRA_ADDRESS_CONSTRAINT (c, p))
3310		      {
3311		        if (EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (operand, c, p))
3312		          win = 1;
3313
3314			/* If we didn't already win, we can reload
3315			   the address into a base register.  */
3316			this_alternative[i] = (int) MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (VOIDmode);
3317			badop = 0;
3318			break;
3319		      }
3320
3321		    if (EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (operand, c, p))
3322		      win = 1;
3323#endif
3324		    break;
3325		  }
3326
3327		this_alternative[i]
3328		  = (int) (reg_class_subunion
3329			   [this_alternative[i]]
3330			   [(int) REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT (c, p)]);
3331	      reg:
3332		if (GET_MODE (operand) == BLKmode)
3333		  break;
3334		winreg = 1;
3335		if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3336		    && reg_fits_class_p (operand, this_alternative[i],
3337					 offset, GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i])))
3338		  win = 1;
3339		break;
3340	      }
3341	  while ((p += len), c);
3342
3343	  constraints[i] = p;
3344
3345	  /* If this operand could be handled with a reg,
3346	     and some reg is allowed, then this operand can be handled.  */
3347	  if (winreg && this_alternative[i] != (int) NO_REGS)
3348	    badop = 0;
3349
3350	  /* Record which operands fit this alternative.  */
3351	  this_alternative_earlyclobber[i] = earlyclobber;
3352	  if (win && ! force_reload)
3353	    this_alternative_win[i] = 1;
3354	  else if (did_match && ! force_reload)
3355	    this_alternative_match_win[i] = 1;
3356	  else
3357	    {
3358	      int const_to_mem = 0;
3359
3360	      this_alternative_offmemok[i] = offmemok;
3361	      losers++;
3362	      if (badop)
3363		bad = 1;
3364	      /* Alternative loses if it has no regs for a reg operand.  */
3365	      if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3366		  && this_alternative[i] == (int) NO_REGS
3367		  && this_alternative_matches[i] < 0)
3368		bad = 1;
3369
3370	      /* If this is a constant that is reloaded into the desired
3371		 class by copying it to memory first, count that as another
3372		 reload.  This is consistent with other code and is
3373		 required to avoid choosing another alternative when
3374		 the constant is moved into memory by this function on
3375		 an early reload pass.  Note that the test here is
3376		 precisely the same as in the code below that calls
3377		 force_const_mem.  */
3378	      if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
3379		  /* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3380		  && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH
3381		  && ((PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (operand,
3382					       (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i])
3383		       == NO_REGS)
3384		      || no_input_reloads)
3385		  && operand_mode[i] != VOIDmode)
3386		{
3387		  const_to_mem = 1;
3388		  if (this_alternative[i] != (int) NO_REGS)
3389		    losers++;
3390		}
3391
3392	      /* If we can't reload this value at all, reject this
3393		 alternative.  Note that we could also lose due to
3394		 LIMIT_RELOAD_RELOAD_CLASS, but we don't check that
3395		 here.  */
3396
3397	      if (! CONSTANT_P (operand)
3398		  && (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i] != NO_REGS
3399		  && (PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (operand,
3400					      (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i])
3401		      == NO_REGS))
3402		bad = 1;
3403
3404	      /* Alternative loses if it requires a type of reload not
3405		 permitted for this insn.  We can always reload SCRATCH
3406		 and objects with a REG_UNUSED note.  */
3407	      else if (GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH
3408		       && modified[i] != RELOAD_READ && no_output_reloads
3409		       && ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, operand))
3410		bad = 1;
3411	      else if (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE && no_input_reloads
3412		       && ! const_to_mem)
3413		bad = 1;
3414
3415#ifdef DISPARAGE_RELOAD_CLASS
3416	      reject
3417		+= DISPARAGE_RELOAD_CLASS (operand,
3418					   (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i]);
3419#endif
3420
3421	      /* We prefer to reload pseudos over reloading other things,
3422		 since such reloads may be able to be eliminated later.
3423		 If we are reloading a SCRATCH, we won't be generating any
3424		 insns, just using a register, so it is also preferred.
3425		 So bump REJECT in other cases.  Don't do this in the
3426		 case where we are forcing a constant into memory and
3427		 it will then win since we don't want to have a different
3428		 alternative match then.  */
3429	      if (! (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3430		     && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3431		  && GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH
3432		  && ! (const_to_mem && constmemok))
3433		reject += 2;
3434
3435	      /* Input reloads can be inherited more often than output
3436		 reloads can be removed, so penalize output reloads.  */
3437	      if (operand_type[i] != RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
3438		  && GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH)
3439		reject++;
3440	    }
3441
3442	  /* If this operand is a pseudo register that didn't get a hard
3443	     reg and this alternative accepts some register, see if the
3444	     class that we want is a subset of the preferred class for this
3445	     register.  If not, but it intersects that class, use the
3446	     preferred class instead.  If it does not intersect the preferred
3447	     class, show that usage of this alternative should be discouraged;
3448	     it will be discouraged more still if the register is `preferred
3449	     or nothing'.  We do this because it increases the chance of
3450	     reusing our spill register in a later insn and avoiding a pair
3451	     of memory stores and loads.
3452
3453	     Don't bother with this if this alternative will accept this
3454	     operand.
3455
3456	     Don't do this for a multiword operand, since it is only a
3457	     small win and has the risk of requiring more spill registers,
3458	     which could cause a large loss.
3459
3460	     Don't do this if the preferred class has only one register
3461	     because we might otherwise exhaust the class.  */
3462
3463	  if (! win && ! did_match
3464	      && this_alternative[i] != (int) NO_REGS
3465	      && GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i]) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
3466	      && reg_class_size[(int) preferred_class[i]] > 1)
3467	    {
3468	      if (! reg_class_subset_p (this_alternative[i],
3469					preferred_class[i]))
3470		{
3471		  /* Since we don't have a way of forming the intersection,
3472		     we just do something special if the preferred class
3473		     is a subset of the class we have; that's the most
3474		     common case anyway.  */
3475		  if (reg_class_subset_p (preferred_class[i],
3476					  this_alternative[i]))
3477		    this_alternative[i] = (int) preferred_class[i];
3478		  else
3479		    reject += (2 + 2 * pref_or_nothing[i]);
3480		}
3481	    }
3482	}
3483
3484      /* Now see if any output operands that are marked "earlyclobber"
3485	 in this alternative conflict with any input operands
3486	 or any memory addresses.  */
3487
3488      for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3489	if (this_alternative_earlyclobber[i]
3490	    && (this_alternative_win[i] || this_alternative_match_win[i]))
3491	  {
3492	    struct decomposition early_data;
3493
3494	    early_data = decompose (recog_data.operand[i]);
3495
3496	    if (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ)
3497	      abort ();
3498
3499	    if (this_alternative[i] == NO_REGS)
3500	      {
3501		this_alternative_earlyclobber[i] = 0;
3502		if (this_insn_is_asm)
3503		  error_for_asm (this_insn,
3504				 "`&' constraint used with no register class");
3505		else
3506		  abort ();
3507	      }
3508
3509	    for (j = 0; j < noperands; j++)
3510	      /* Is this an input operand or a memory ref?  */
3511	      if ((GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[j]) == MEM
3512		   || modified[j] != RELOAD_WRITE)
3513		  && j != i
3514		  /* Ignore things like match_operator operands.  */
3515		  && *recog_data.constraints[j] != 0
3516		  /* Don't count an input operand that is constrained to match
3517		     the early clobber operand.  */
3518		  && ! (this_alternative_matches[j] == i
3519			&& rtx_equal_p (recog_data.operand[i],
3520					recog_data.operand[j]))
3521		  /* Is it altered by storing the earlyclobber operand?  */
3522		  && !immune_p (recog_data.operand[j], recog_data.operand[i],
3523				early_data))
3524		{
3525		  /* If the output is in a single-reg class,
3526		     it's costly to reload it, so reload the input instead.  */
3527		  if (reg_class_size[this_alternative[i]] == 1
3528		      && (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[j]) == REG
3529			  || GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[j]) == SUBREG))
3530		    {
3531		      losers++;
3532		      this_alternative_win[j] = 0;
3533		      this_alternative_match_win[j] = 0;
3534		    }
3535		  else
3536		    break;
3537		}
3538	    /* If an earlyclobber operand conflicts with something,
3539	       it must be reloaded, so request this and count the cost.  */
3540	    if (j != noperands)
3541	      {
3542		losers++;
3543		this_alternative_win[i] = 0;
3544		this_alternative_match_win[j] = 0;
3545		for (j = 0; j < noperands; j++)
3546		  if (this_alternative_matches[j] == i
3547		      && this_alternative_match_win[j])
3548		    {
3549		      this_alternative_win[j] = 0;
3550		      this_alternative_match_win[j] = 0;
3551		      losers++;
3552		    }
3553	      }
3554	  }
3555
3556      /* If one alternative accepts all the operands, no reload required,
3557	 choose that alternative; don't consider the remaining ones.  */
3558      if (losers == 0)
3559	{
3560	  /* Unswap these so that they are never swapped at `finish'.  */
3561	  if (commutative >= 0)
3562	    {
3563	      recog_data.operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative];
3564	      recog_data.operand[commutative + 1]
3565		= substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3566	    }
3567	  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3568	    {
3569	      goal_alternative_win[i] = this_alternative_win[i];
3570	      goal_alternative_match_win[i] = this_alternative_match_win[i];
3571	      goal_alternative[i] = this_alternative[i];
3572	      goal_alternative_offmemok[i] = this_alternative_offmemok[i];
3573	      goal_alternative_matches[i] = this_alternative_matches[i];
3574	      goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i]
3575		= this_alternative_earlyclobber[i];
3576	    }
3577	  goal_alternative_number = this_alternative_number;
3578	  goal_alternative_swapped = swapped;
3579	  goal_earlyclobber = this_earlyclobber;
3580	  goto finish;
3581	}
3582
3583      /* REJECT, set by the ! and ? constraint characters and when a register
3584	 would be reloaded into a non-preferred class, discourages the use of
3585	 this alternative for a reload goal.  REJECT is incremented by six
3586	 for each ? and two for each non-preferred class.  */
3587      losers = losers * 6 + reject;
3588
3589      /* If this alternative can be made to work by reloading,
3590	 and it needs less reloading than the others checked so far,
3591	 record it as the chosen goal for reloading.  */
3592      if (! bad && best > losers)
3593	{
3594	  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3595	    {
3596	      goal_alternative[i] = this_alternative[i];
3597	      goal_alternative_win[i] = this_alternative_win[i];
3598	      goal_alternative_match_win[i] = this_alternative_match_win[i];
3599	      goal_alternative_offmemok[i] = this_alternative_offmemok[i];
3600	      goal_alternative_matches[i] = this_alternative_matches[i];
3601	      goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i]
3602		= this_alternative_earlyclobber[i];
3603	    }
3604	  goal_alternative_swapped = swapped;
3605	  best = losers;
3606	  goal_alternative_number = this_alternative_number;
3607	  goal_earlyclobber = this_earlyclobber;
3608	}
3609    }
3610
3611  /* If insn is commutative (it's safe to exchange a certain pair of operands)
3612     then we need to try each alternative twice,
3613     the second time matching those two operands
3614     as if we had exchanged them.
3615     To do this, really exchange them in operands.
3616
3617     If we have just tried the alternatives the second time,
3618     return operands to normal and drop through.  */
3619
3620  if (commutative >= 0)
3621    {
3622      swapped = !swapped;
3623      if (swapped)
3624	{
3625	  enum reg_class tclass;
3626	  int t;
3627
3628	  recog_data.operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3629	  recog_data.operand[commutative + 1] = substed_operand[commutative];
3630	  /* Swap the duplicates too.  */
3631	  for (i = 0; i < recog_data.n_dups; i++)
3632	    if (recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative
3633		|| recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative + 1)
3634	      *recog_data.dup_loc[i]
3635		 = recog_data.operand[(int) recog_data.dup_num[i]];
3636
3637	  tclass = preferred_class[commutative];
3638	  preferred_class[commutative] = preferred_class[commutative + 1];
3639	  preferred_class[commutative + 1] = tclass;
3640
3641	  t = pref_or_nothing[commutative];
3642	  pref_or_nothing[commutative] = pref_or_nothing[commutative + 1];
3643	  pref_or_nothing[commutative + 1] = t;
3644
3645	  memcpy (constraints, recog_data.constraints,
3646		  noperands * sizeof (char *));
3647	  goto try_swapped;
3648	}
3649      else
3650	{
3651	  recog_data.operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative];
3652	  recog_data.operand[commutative + 1]
3653	    = substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3654	  /* Unswap the duplicates too.  */
3655	  for (i = 0; i < recog_data.n_dups; i++)
3656	    if (recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative
3657		|| recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative + 1)
3658	      *recog_data.dup_loc[i]
3659		 = recog_data.operand[(int) recog_data.dup_num[i]];
3660	}
3661    }
3662
3663  /* The operands don't meet the constraints.
3664     goal_alternative describes the alternative
3665     that we could reach by reloading the fewest operands.
3666     Reload so as to fit it.  */
3667
3668  if (best == MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS * 2 + 600)
3669    {
3670      /* No alternative works with reloads??  */
3671      if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3672	fatal_insn ("unable to generate reloads for:", insn);
3673      error_for_asm (insn, "inconsistent operand constraints in an `asm'");
3674      /* Avoid further trouble with this insn.  */
3675      PATTERN (insn) = gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
3676      n_reloads = 0;
3677      return 0;
3678    }
3679
3680  /* Jump to `finish' from above if all operands are valid already.
3681     In that case, goal_alternative_win is all 1.  */
3682 finish:
3683
3684  /* Right now, for any pair of operands I and J that are required to match,
3685     with I < J,
3686     goal_alternative_matches[J] is I.
3687     Set up goal_alternative_matched as the inverse function:
3688     goal_alternative_matched[I] = J.  */
3689
3690  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3691    goal_alternative_matched[i] = -1;
3692
3693  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3694    if (! goal_alternative_win[i]
3695	&& goal_alternative_matches[i] >= 0)
3696      goal_alternative_matched[goal_alternative_matches[i]] = i;
3697
3698  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3699    goal_alternative_win[i] |= goal_alternative_match_win[i];
3700
3701  /* If the best alternative is with operands 1 and 2 swapped,
3702     consider them swapped before reporting the reloads.  Update the
3703     operand numbers of any reloads already pushed.  */
3704
3705  if (goal_alternative_swapped)
3706    {
3707      rtx tem;
3708
3709      tem = substed_operand[commutative];
3710      substed_operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3711      substed_operand[commutative + 1] = tem;
3712      tem = recog_data.operand[commutative];
3713      recog_data.operand[commutative] = recog_data.operand[commutative + 1];
3714      recog_data.operand[commutative + 1] = tem;
3715      tem = *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative];
3716      *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative]
3717	= *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative + 1];
3718      *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative + 1] = tem;
3719
3720      for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
3721	{
3722	  if (rld[i].opnum == commutative)
3723	    rld[i].opnum = commutative + 1;
3724	  else if (rld[i].opnum == commutative + 1)
3725	    rld[i].opnum = commutative;
3726	}
3727    }
3728
3729  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3730    {
3731      operand_reloadnum[i] = -1;
3732
3733      /* If this is an earlyclobber operand, we need to widen the scope.
3734	 The reload must remain valid from the start of the insn being
3735	 reloaded until after the operand is stored into its destination.
3736	 We approximate this with RELOAD_OTHER even though we know that we
3737	 do not conflict with RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS reloads.
3738
3739	 One special case that is worth checking is when we have an
3740	 output that is earlyclobber but isn't used past the insn (typically
3741	 a SCRATCH).  In this case, we only need have the reload live
3742	 through the insn itself, but not for any of our input or output
3743	 reloads.
3744	 But we must not accidentally narrow the scope of an existing
3745	 RELOAD_OTHER reload - leave these alone.
3746
3747	 In any case, anything needed to address this operand can remain
3748	 however they were previously categorized.  */
3749
3750      if (goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i] && operand_type[i] != RELOAD_OTHER)
3751	operand_type[i]
3752	  = (find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, recog_data.operand[i])
3753	     ? RELOAD_FOR_INSN : RELOAD_OTHER);
3754    }
3755
3756  /* Any constants that aren't allowed and can't be reloaded
3757     into registers are here changed into memory references.  */
3758  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3759    if (! goal_alternative_win[i]
3760	&& CONSTANT_P (recog_data.operand[i])
3761	/* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3762	&& GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) != HIGH
3763	&& ((PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (recog_data.operand[i],
3764				     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i])
3765	     == NO_REGS)
3766	    || no_input_reloads)
3767	&& operand_mode[i] != VOIDmode)
3768      {
3769	substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
3770	  = find_reloads_toplev (force_const_mem (operand_mode[i],
3771						  recog_data.operand[i]),
3772				 i, address_type[i], ind_levels, 0, insn,
3773				 NULL);
3774	if (alternative_allows_memconst (recog_data.constraints[i],
3775					 goal_alternative_number))
3776	  goal_alternative_win[i] = 1;
3777      }
3778
3779  /* Record the values of the earlyclobber operands for the caller.  */
3780  if (goal_earlyclobber)
3781    for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3782      if (goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i])
3783	reload_earlyclobbers[n_earlyclobbers++] = recog_data.operand[i];
3784
3785  /* Now record reloads for all the operands that need them.  */
3786  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3787    if (! goal_alternative_win[i])
3788      {
3789	/* Operands that match previous ones have already been handled.  */
3790	if (goal_alternative_matches[i] >= 0)
3791	  ;
3792	/* Handle an operand with a nonoffsettable address
3793	   appearing where an offsettable address will do
3794	   by reloading the address into a base register.
3795
3796	   ??? We can also do this when the operand is a register and
3797	   reg_equiv_mem is not offsettable, but this is a bit tricky,
3798	   so we don't bother with it.  It may not be worth doing.  */
3799	else if (goal_alternative_matched[i] == -1
3800		 && goal_alternative_offmemok[i]
3801		 && GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == MEM)
3802	  {
3803	    operand_reloadnum[i]
3804	      = push_reload (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), NULL_RTX,
3805			     &XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), (rtx*) 0,
3806			     MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (VOIDmode),
3807			     GET_MODE (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0)),
3808			     VOIDmode, 0, 0, i, RELOAD_FOR_INPUT);
3809	    rld[operand_reloadnum[i]].inc
3810	      = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]));
3811
3812	    /* If this operand is an output, we will have made any
3813	       reloads for its address as RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS, but
3814	       now we are treating part of the operand as an input, so
3815	       we must change these to RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS.  */
3816
3817	    if (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE)
3818	      {
3819		for (j = 0; j < n_reloads; j++)
3820		  {
3821		    if (rld[j].opnum == i)
3822		      {
3823			if (rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS)
3824			  rld[j].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS;
3825			else if (rld[j].when_needed
3826				 == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
3827			  rld[j].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS;
3828		      }
3829		  }
3830	      }
3831	  }
3832	else if (goal_alternative_matched[i] == -1)
3833	  {
3834	    operand_reloadnum[i]
3835	      = push_reload ((modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3836			      ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3837			     (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3838			      ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3839			     (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3840			      ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3841			     (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3842			      ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3843			     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3844			     (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE
3845			      ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3846			     (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3847			      ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3848			     (insn_code_number < 0 ? 0
3849			      : insn_data[insn_code_number].operand[i].strict_low),
3850			     0, i, operand_type[i]);
3851	  }
3852	/* In a matching pair of operands, one must be input only
3853	   and the other must be output only.
3854	   Pass the input operand as IN and the other as OUT.  */
3855	else if (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3856		 && modified[goal_alternative_matched[i]] == RELOAD_WRITE)
3857	  {
3858	    operand_reloadnum[i]
3859	      = push_reload (recog_data.operand[i],
3860			     recog_data.operand[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3861			     recog_data.operand_loc[i],
3862			     recog_data.operand_loc[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3863			     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3864			     operand_mode[i],
3865			     operand_mode[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3866			     0, 0, i, RELOAD_OTHER);
3867	    operand_reloadnum[goal_alternative_matched[i]] = output_reloadnum;
3868	  }
3869	else if (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE
3870		 && modified[goal_alternative_matched[i]] == RELOAD_READ)
3871	  {
3872	    operand_reloadnum[goal_alternative_matched[i]]
3873	      = push_reload (recog_data.operand[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3874			     recog_data.operand[i],
3875			     recog_data.operand_loc[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3876			     recog_data.operand_loc[i],
3877			     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3878			     operand_mode[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3879			     operand_mode[i],
3880			     0, 0, i, RELOAD_OTHER);
3881	    operand_reloadnum[i] = output_reloadnum;
3882	  }
3883	else if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3884	  abort ();
3885	else
3886	  {
3887	    error_for_asm (insn, "inconsistent operand constraints in an `asm'");
3888	    /* Avoid further trouble with this insn.  */
3889	    PATTERN (insn) = gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
3890	    n_reloads = 0;
3891	    return 0;
3892	  }
3893      }
3894    else if (goal_alternative_matched[i] < 0
3895	     && goal_alternative_matches[i] < 0
3896	     && !address_operand_reloaded[i]
3897	     && optimize)
3898      {
3899	/* For each non-matching operand that's a MEM or a pseudo-register
3900	   that didn't get a hard register, make an optional reload.
3901	   This may get done even if the insn needs no reloads otherwise.  */
3902
3903	rtx operand = recog_data.operand[i];
3904
3905	while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
3906	  operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
3907	if ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3908	     || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3909		 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
3910	    /* If this is only for an output, the optional reload would not
3911	       actually cause us to use a register now, just note that
3912	       something is stored here.  */
3913	    && ((enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i] != NO_REGS
3914		|| modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE)
3915	    && ! no_input_reloads
3916	    /* An optional output reload might allow to delete INSN later.
3917	       We mustn't make in-out reloads on insns that are not permitted
3918	       output reloads.
3919	       If this is an asm, we can't delete it; we must not even call
3920	       push_reload for an optional output reload in this case,
3921	       because we can't be sure that the constraint allows a register,
3922	       and push_reload verifies the constraints for asms.  */
3923	    && (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3924		|| (! no_output_reloads && ! this_insn_is_asm)))
3925	  operand_reloadnum[i]
3926	    = push_reload ((modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3927			    ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3928			   (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3929			    ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3930			   (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3931			    ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3932			   (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3933			    ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3934			   (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3935			   (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE
3936			    ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3937			   (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3938			    ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3939			   (insn_code_number < 0 ? 0
3940			    : insn_data[insn_code_number].operand[i].strict_low),
3941			   1, i, operand_type[i]);
3942	/* If a memory reference remains (either as a MEM or a pseudo that
3943	   did not get a hard register), yet we can't make an optional
3944	   reload, check if this is actually a pseudo register reference;
3945	   we then need to emit a USE and/or a CLOBBER so that reload
3946	   inheritance will do the right thing.  */
3947	else if (replace
3948		 && (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3949		     || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3950			 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3951			 && reg_renumber [REGNO (operand)] < 0)))
3952	  {
3953	    operand = *recog_data.operand_loc[i];
3954
3955	    while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
3956	      operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
3957	    if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG)
3958	      {
3959		if (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE)
3960		  /* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize
3961		     it as one that can be safely deleted at the end
3962		     of reload.  */
3963		  PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, operand),
3964					      insn), QImode);
3965		if (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ)
3966		  emit_insn_after (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, operand), insn);
3967	      }
3968	  }
3969      }
3970    else if (goal_alternative_matches[i] >= 0
3971	     && goal_alternative_win[goal_alternative_matches[i]]
3972	     && modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3973	     && modified[goal_alternative_matches[i]] == RELOAD_WRITE
3974	     && ! no_input_reloads && ! no_output_reloads
3975	     && optimize)
3976      {
3977	/* Similarly, make an optional reload for a pair of matching
3978	   objects that are in MEM or a pseudo that didn't get a hard reg.  */
3979
3980	rtx operand = recog_data.operand[i];
3981
3982	while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
3983	  operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
3984	if ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3985	     || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3986		 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
3987	    && ((enum reg_class) goal_alternative[goal_alternative_matches[i]]
3988		!= NO_REGS))
3989	  operand_reloadnum[i] = operand_reloadnum[goal_alternative_matches[i]]
3990	    = push_reload (recog_data.operand[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
3991			   recog_data.operand[i],
3992			   recog_data.operand_loc[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
3993			   recog_data.operand_loc[i],
3994			   (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
3995			   operand_mode[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
3996			   operand_mode[i],
3997			   0, 1, goal_alternative_matches[i], RELOAD_OTHER);
3998      }
3999
4000  /* Perform whatever substitutions on the operands we are supposed
4001     to make due to commutativity or replacement of registers
4002     with equivalent constants or memory slots.  */
4003
4004  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
4005    {
4006      /* We only do this on the last pass through reload, because it is
4007	 possible for some data (like reg_equiv_address) to be changed during
4008	 later passes.  Moreover, we loose the opportunity to get a useful
4009	 reload_{in,out}_reg when we do these replacements.  */
4010
4011      if (replace)
4012	{
4013	  rtx substitution = substed_operand[i];
4014
4015	  *recog_data.operand_loc[i] = substitution;
4016
4017	  /* If we're replacing an operand with a LABEL_REF, we need
4018	     to make sure that there's a REG_LABEL note attached to
4019	     this instruction.  */
4020	  if (GET_CODE (insn) != JUMP_INSN
4021	      && GET_CODE (substitution) == LABEL_REF
4022	      && !find_reg_note (insn, REG_LABEL, XEXP (substitution, 0)))
4023	    REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_INSN_LIST (REG_LABEL,
4024						  XEXP (substitution, 0),
4025						  REG_NOTES (insn));
4026	}
4027      else
4028	retval |= (substed_operand[i] != *recog_data.operand_loc[i]);
4029    }
4030
4031  /* If this insn pattern contains any MATCH_DUP's, make sure that
4032     they will be substituted if the operands they match are substituted.
4033     Also do now any substitutions we already did on the operands.
4034
4035     Don't do this if we aren't making replacements because we might be
4036     propagating things allocated by frame pointer elimination into places
4037     it doesn't expect.  */
4038
4039  if (insn_code_number >= 0 && replace)
4040    for (i = insn_data[insn_code_number].n_dups - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4041      {
4042	int opno = recog_data.dup_num[i];
4043	*recog_data.dup_loc[i] = *recog_data.operand_loc[opno];
4044	dup_replacements (recog_data.dup_loc[i], recog_data.operand_loc[opno]);
4045      }
4046
4047#if 0
4048  /* This loses because reloading of prior insns can invalidate the equivalence
4049     (or at least find_equiv_reg isn't smart enough to find it any more),
4050     causing this insn to need more reload regs than it needed before.
4051     It may be too late to make the reload regs available.
4052     Now this optimization is done safely in choose_reload_regs.  */
4053
4054  /* For each reload of a reg into some other class of reg,
4055     search for an existing equivalent reg (same value now) in the right class.
4056     We can use it as long as we don't need to change its contents.  */
4057  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4058    if (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
4059	&& rld[i].in != 0
4060	&& GET_CODE (rld[i].in) == REG
4061	&& rld[i].out == 0)
4062      {
4063	rld[i].reg_rtx
4064	  = find_equiv_reg (rld[i].in, insn, rld[i].class, -1,
4065			    static_reload_reg_p, 0, rld[i].inmode);
4066	/* Prevent generation of insn to load the value
4067	   because the one we found already has the value.  */
4068	if (rld[i].reg_rtx)
4069	  rld[i].in = rld[i].reg_rtx;
4070      }
4071#endif
4072
4073  /* Perhaps an output reload can be combined with another
4074     to reduce needs by one.  */
4075  if (!goal_earlyclobber)
4076    combine_reloads ();
4077
4078  /* If we have a pair of reloads for parts of an address, they are reloading
4079     the same object, the operands themselves were not reloaded, and they
4080     are for two operands that are supposed to match, merge the reloads and
4081     change the type of the surviving reload to RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS.  */
4082
4083  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4084    {
4085      int k;
4086
4087      for (j = i + 1; j < n_reloads; j++)
4088	if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4089	     || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4090	     || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4091	     || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4092	    && (rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4093		|| rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4094		|| rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4095		|| rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4096	    && rtx_equal_p (rld[i].in, rld[j].in)
4097	    && (operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum] < 0
4098		|| rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum]].optional)
4099	    && (operand_reloadnum[rld[j].opnum] < 0
4100		|| rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[j].opnum]].optional)
4101	    && (goal_alternative_matches[rld[i].opnum] == rld[j].opnum
4102		|| (goal_alternative_matches[rld[j].opnum]
4103		    == rld[i].opnum)))
4104	  {
4105	    for (k = 0; k < n_replacements; k++)
4106	      if (replacements[k].what == j)
4107		replacements[k].what = i;
4108
4109	    if (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4110		|| rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4111	      rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4112	    else
4113	      rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS;
4114	    rld[j].in = 0;
4115	  }
4116    }
4117
4118  /* Scan all the reloads and update their type.
4119     If a reload is for the address of an operand and we didn't reload
4120     that operand, change the type.  Similarly, change the operand number
4121     of a reload when two operands match.  If a reload is optional, treat it
4122     as though the operand isn't reloaded.
4123
4124     ??? This latter case is somewhat odd because if we do the optional
4125     reload, it means the object is hanging around.  Thus we need only
4126     do the address reload if the optional reload was NOT done.
4127
4128     Change secondary reloads to be the address type of their operand, not
4129     the normal type.
4130
4131     If an operand's reload is now RELOAD_OTHER, change any
4132     RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS reloads of that operand to
4133     RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS.  */
4134
4135  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4136    {
4137      if (rld[i].secondary_p
4138	  && rld[i].when_needed == operand_type[rld[i].opnum])
4139	rld[i].when_needed = address_type[rld[i].opnum];
4140
4141      if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4142	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4143	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4144	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4145	  && (operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum] < 0
4146	      || rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum]].optional))
4147	{
4148	  /* If we have a secondary reload to go along with this reload,
4149	     change its type to RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR.  */
4150
4151	  if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4152	       || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS)
4153	      && rld[i].secondary_in_reload != -1)
4154	    {
4155	      int secondary_in_reload = rld[i].secondary_in_reload;
4156
4157	      rld[secondary_in_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4158
4159	      /* If there's a tertiary reload we have to change it also.  */
4160	      if (secondary_in_reload > 0
4161		  && rld[secondary_in_reload].secondary_in_reload != -1)
4162		rld[rld[secondary_in_reload].secondary_in_reload].when_needed
4163		  = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4164	    }
4165
4166	  if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4167	       || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4168	      && rld[i].secondary_out_reload != -1)
4169	    {
4170	      int secondary_out_reload = rld[i].secondary_out_reload;
4171
4172	      rld[secondary_out_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4173
4174	      /* If there's a tertiary reload we have to change it also.  */
4175	      if (secondary_out_reload
4176		  && rld[secondary_out_reload].secondary_out_reload != -1)
4177		rld[rld[secondary_out_reload].secondary_out_reload].when_needed
4178		  = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4179	    }
4180
4181	  if (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4182	      || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4183	    rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4184	  else
4185	    rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS;
4186	}
4187
4188      if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4189	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS)
4190	  && operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum] >= 0
4191	  && (rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum]].when_needed
4192	      == RELOAD_OTHER))
4193	rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS;
4194
4195      if (goal_alternative_matches[rld[i].opnum] >= 0)
4196	rld[i].opnum = goal_alternative_matches[rld[i].opnum];
4197    }
4198
4199  /* Scan all the reloads, and check for RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.
4200     If we have more than one, then convert all RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR
4201     reloads to RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.
4202
4203     choose_reload_regs assumes that RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR reloads never
4204     conflict with RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.  This is true for a
4205     single pair of RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR/RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.
4206     However, if there is more than one RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reload,
4207     then a RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR reload conflicts with all
4208     RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads other than the one that uses it.
4209     This is complicated by the fact that a single operand can have more
4210     than one RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reload.  It is very difficult to fix
4211     choose_reload_regs without affecting code quality, and cases that
4212     actually fail are extremely rare, so it turns out to be better to fix
4213     the problem here by not generating cases that choose_reload_regs will
4214     fail for.  */
4215  /* There is a similar problem with RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS /
4216     RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS when there is more than one of a kind for
4217     a single operand.
4218     We can reduce the register pressure by exploiting that a
4219     RELOAD_FOR_X_ADDR_ADDR that precedes all RELOAD_FOR_X_ADDRESS reloads
4220     does not conflict with any of them, if it is only used for the first of
4221     the RELOAD_FOR_X_ADDRESS reloads.  */
4222  {
4223    int first_op_addr_num = -2;
4224    int first_inpaddr_num[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
4225    int first_outpaddr_num[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
4226    int need_change = 0;
4227    /* We use last_op_addr_reload and the contents of the above arrays
4228       first as flags - -2 means no instance encountered, -1 means exactly
4229       one instance encountered.
4230       If more than one instance has been encountered, we store the reload
4231       number of the first reload of the kind in question; reload numbers
4232       are known to be non-negative.  */
4233    for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
4234      first_inpaddr_num[i] = first_outpaddr_num[i] = -2;
4235    for (i = n_reloads - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4236      {
4237	switch (rld[i].when_needed)
4238	  {
4239	  case RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS:
4240	    if (++first_op_addr_num >= 0)
4241	      {
4242		first_op_addr_num = i;
4243		need_change = 1;
4244	      }
4245	    break;
4246	  case RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS:
4247	    if (++first_inpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] >= 0)
4248	      {
4249		first_inpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] = i;
4250		need_change = 1;
4251	      }
4252	    break;
4253	  case RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS:
4254	    if (++first_outpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] >= 0)
4255	      {
4256		first_outpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] = i;
4257		need_change = 1;
4258	      }
4259	    break;
4260	  default:
4261	    break;
4262	  }
4263      }
4264
4265    if (need_change)
4266      {
4267	for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4268	  {
4269	    int first_num;
4270	    enum reload_type type;
4271
4272	    switch (rld[i].when_needed)
4273	      {
4274	      case RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR:
4275		first_num = first_op_addr_num;
4276		type = RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS;
4277		break;
4278	      case RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS:
4279		first_num = first_inpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum];
4280		type = RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS;
4281		break;
4282	      case RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS:
4283		first_num = first_outpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum];
4284		type = RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS;
4285		break;
4286	      default:
4287		continue;
4288	      }
4289	    if (first_num < 0)
4290	      continue;
4291	    else if (i > first_num)
4292	      rld[i].when_needed = type;
4293	    else
4294	      {
4295		/* Check if the only TYPE reload that uses reload I is
4296		   reload FIRST_NUM.  */
4297		for (j = n_reloads - 1; j > first_num; j--)
4298		  {
4299		    if (rld[j].when_needed == type
4300			&& (rld[i].secondary_p
4301			    ? rld[j].secondary_in_reload == i
4302			    : reg_mentioned_p (rld[i].in, rld[j].in)))
4303		      {
4304			rld[i].when_needed = type;
4305			break;
4306		      }
4307		  }
4308	      }
4309	  }
4310      }
4311  }
4312
4313  /* See if we have any reloads that are now allowed to be merged
4314     because we've changed when the reload is needed to
4315     RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS or RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS.  Only
4316     check for the most common cases.  */
4317
4318  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4319    if (rld[i].in != 0 && rld[i].out == 0
4320	&& (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS
4321	    || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR
4322	    || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS))
4323      for (j = 0; j < n_reloads; j++)
4324	if (i != j && rld[j].in != 0 && rld[j].out == 0
4325	    && rld[j].when_needed == rld[i].when_needed
4326	    && MATCHES (rld[i].in, rld[j].in)
4327	    && rld[i].class == rld[j].class
4328	    && !rld[i].nocombine && !rld[j].nocombine
4329	    && rld[i].reg_rtx == rld[j].reg_rtx)
4330	  {
4331	    rld[i].opnum = MIN (rld[i].opnum, rld[j].opnum);
4332	    transfer_replacements (i, j);
4333	    rld[j].in = 0;
4334	  }
4335
4336#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4337  /* If we made any reloads for addresses, see if they violate a
4338     "no input reloads" requirement for this insn.  But loads that we
4339     do after the insn (such as for output addresses) are fine.  */
4340  if (no_input_reloads)
4341    for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4342      if (rld[i].in != 0
4343	  && rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS
4344	  && rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS)
4345	abort ();
4346#endif
4347
4348  /* Compute reload_mode and reload_nregs.  */
4349  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4350    {
4351      rld[i].mode
4352	= (rld[i].inmode == VOIDmode
4353	   || (GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].outmode)
4354	       > GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].inmode)))
4355	  ? rld[i].outmode : rld[i].inmode;
4356
4357      rld[i].nregs = CLASS_MAX_NREGS (rld[i].class, rld[i].mode);
4358    }
4359
4360  /* Special case a simple move with an input reload and a
4361     destination of a hard reg, if the hard reg is ok, use it.  */
4362  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4363    if (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
4364	&& GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
4365	&& GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
4366	&& SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)) == rld[i].in)
4367      {
4368	rtx dest = SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn));
4369	unsigned int regno = REGNO (dest);
4370
4371	if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4372	    && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[rld[i].class], regno)
4373	    && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, rld[i].mode))
4374	  {
4375	    int nr = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, rld[i].mode);
4376	    int ok = 1, nri;
4377
4378	    for (nri = 1; nri < nr; nri ++)
4379	      if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[rld[i].class], regno + nri))
4380		ok = 0;
4381
4382	    if (ok)
4383	      rld[i].reg_rtx = dest;
4384	  }
4385      }
4386
4387  return retval;
4388}
4389
4390/* Return 1 if alternative number ALTNUM in constraint-string CONSTRAINT
4391   accepts a memory operand with constant address.  */
4392
4393static int
4394alternative_allows_memconst (const char *constraint, int altnum)
4395{
4396  int c;
4397  /* Skip alternatives before the one requested.  */
4398  while (altnum > 0)
4399    {
4400      while (*constraint++ != ',');
4401      altnum--;
4402    }
4403  /* Scan the requested alternative for 'm' or 'o'.
4404     If one of them is present, this alternative accepts memory constants.  */
4405  for (; (c = *constraint) && c != ',' && c != '#';
4406       constraint += CONSTRAINT_LEN (c, constraint))
4407    if (c == 'm' || c == 'o' || EXTRA_MEMORY_CONSTRAINT (c, constraint))
4408      return 1;
4409  return 0;
4410}
4411
4412/* Scan X for memory references and scan the addresses for reloading.
4413   Also checks for references to "constant" regs that we want to eliminate
4414   and replaces them with the values they stand for.
4415   We may alter X destructively if it contains a reference to such.
4416   If X is just a constant reg, we return the equivalent value
4417   instead of X.
4418
4419   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing this machine
4420   supports.
4421
4422   OPNUM and TYPE identify the purpose of the reload.
4423
4424   IS_SET_DEST is true if X is the destination of a SET, which is not
4425   appropriate to be replaced by a constant.
4426
4427   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
4428   to determine if we may generate output reloads, and where to put USEs
4429   for pseudos that we have to replace with stack slots.
4430
4431   ADDRESS_RELOADED.  If nonzero, is a pointer to where we put the
4432   result of find_reloads_address.  */
4433
4434static rtx
4435find_reloads_toplev (rtx x, int opnum, enum reload_type type,
4436		     int ind_levels, int is_set_dest, rtx insn,
4437		     int *address_reloaded)
4438{
4439  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
4440
4441  const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4442  int i;
4443  int copied;
4444
4445  if (code == REG)
4446    {
4447      /* This code is duplicated for speed in find_reloads.  */
4448      int regno = REGNO (x);
4449      if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0 && !is_set_dest)
4450	x = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
4451#if 0
4452      /*  This creates (subreg (mem...)) which would cause an unnecessary
4453	  reload of the mem.  */
4454      else if (reg_equiv_mem[regno] != 0)
4455	x = reg_equiv_mem[regno];
4456#endif
4457      else if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno]
4458	       && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
4459	{
4460	  rtx mem = make_memloc (x, regno);
4461	  if (reg_equiv_address[regno]
4462	      || ! rtx_equal_p (mem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
4463	    {
4464	      /* If this is not a toplevel operand, find_reloads doesn't see
4465		 this substitution.  We have to emit a USE of the pseudo so
4466		 that delete_output_reload can see it.  */
4467	      if (replace_reloads && recog_data.operand[opnum] != x)
4468		/* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize it
4469		   as one that can be safely deleted at the end of
4470		   reload.  */
4471		PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, x), insn),
4472			  QImode);
4473	      x = mem;
4474	      i = find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &x, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
4475					opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
4476	      if (address_reloaded)
4477		*address_reloaded = i;
4478	    }
4479	}
4480      return x;
4481    }
4482  if (code == MEM)
4483    {
4484      rtx tem = x;
4485
4486      i = find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &tem, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
4487				opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
4488      if (address_reloaded)
4489	*address_reloaded = i;
4490
4491      return tem;
4492    }
4493
4494  if (code == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG)
4495    {
4496      /* Check for SUBREG containing a REG that's equivalent to a constant.
4497	 If the constant has a known value, truncate it right now.
4498	 Similarly if we are extracting a single-word of a multi-word
4499	 constant.  If the constant is symbolic, allow it to be substituted
4500	 normally.  push_reload will strip the subreg later.  If the
4501	 constant is VOIDmode, abort because we will lose the mode of
4502	 the register (this should never happen because one of the cases
4503	 above should handle it).  */
4504
4505      int regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
4506      rtx tem;
4507
4508      if (subreg_lowpart_p (x)
4509	  && regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
4510	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0
4511	  && (tem = gen_lowpart_common (GET_MODE (x),
4512					reg_equiv_constant[regno])) != 0)
4513	return tem;
4514
4515      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
4516	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
4517	{
4518	  tem =
4519	    simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (x), reg_equiv_constant[regno],
4520				 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
4521	  if (!tem)
4522	    abort ();
4523	  return tem;
4524	}
4525
4526      /* If the subreg contains a reg that will be converted to a mem,
4527	 convert the subreg to a narrower memref now.
4528	 Otherwise, we would get (subreg (mem ...) ...),
4529	 which would force reload of the mem.
4530
4531	 We also need to do this if there is an equivalent MEM that is
4532	 not offsettable.  In that case, alter_subreg would produce an
4533	 invalid address on big-endian machines.
4534
4535	 For machines that extend byte loads, we must not reload using
4536	 a wider mode if we have a paradoxical SUBREG.  find_reloads will
4537	 force a reload in that case.  So we should not do anything here.  */
4538
4539      else if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4540#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
4541	       && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
4542		   <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4543#endif
4544	       && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0
4545		   || (reg_equiv_mem[regno] != 0
4546		       && (! strict_memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x),
4547						      XEXP (reg_equiv_mem[regno], 0))
4548			   || ! offsettable_memref_p (reg_equiv_mem[regno])
4549			   || num_not_at_initial_offset))))
4550	x = find_reloads_subreg_address (x, 1, opnum, type, ind_levels,
4551					 insn);
4552    }
4553
4554  for (copied = 0, i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4555    {
4556      if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4557	{
4558	  rtx new_part = find_reloads_toplev (XEXP (x, i), opnum, type,
4559					      ind_levels, is_set_dest, insn,
4560					      address_reloaded);
4561	  /* If we have replaced a reg with it's equivalent memory loc -
4562	     that can still be handled here e.g. if it's in a paradoxical
4563	     subreg - we must make the change in a copy, rather than using
4564	     a destructive change.  This way, find_reloads can still elect
4565	     not to do the change.  */
4566	  if (new_part != XEXP (x, i) && ! CONSTANT_P (new_part) && ! copied)
4567	    {
4568	      x = shallow_copy_rtx (x);
4569	      copied = 1;
4570	    }
4571	  XEXP (x, i) = new_part;
4572	}
4573    }
4574  return x;
4575}
4576
4577/* Return a mem ref for the memory equivalent of reg REGNO.
4578   This mem ref is not shared with anything.  */
4579
4580static rtx
4581make_memloc (rtx ad, int regno)
4582{
4583  /* We must rerun eliminate_regs, in case the elimination
4584     offsets have changed.  */
4585  rtx tem
4586    = XEXP (eliminate_regs (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno], 0, NULL_RTX), 0);
4587
4588  /* If TEM might contain a pseudo, we must copy it to avoid
4589     modifying it when we do the substitution for the reload.  */
4590  if (rtx_varies_p (tem, 0))
4591    tem = copy_rtx (tem);
4592
4593  tem = replace_equiv_address_nv (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno], tem);
4594  tem = adjust_address_nv (tem, GET_MODE (ad), 0);
4595
4596  /* Copy the result if it's still the same as the equivalence, to avoid
4597     modifying it when we do the substitution for the reload.  */
4598  if (tem == reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno])
4599    tem = copy_rtx (tem);
4600  return tem;
4601}
4602
4603/* Returns true if AD could be turned into a valid memory reference
4604   to mode MODE by reloading the part pointed to by PART into a
4605   register.  */
4606
4607static int
4608maybe_memory_address_p (enum machine_mode mode, rtx ad, rtx *part)
4609{
4610  int retv;
4611  rtx tem = *part;
4612  rtx reg = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (tem), max_reg_num ());
4613
4614  *part = reg;
4615  retv = memory_address_p (mode, ad);
4616  *part = tem;
4617
4618  return retv;
4619}
4620
4621/* Record all reloads needed for handling memory address AD
4622   which appears in *LOC in a memory reference to mode MODE
4623   which itself is found in location  *MEMREFLOC.
4624   Note that we take shortcuts assuming that no multi-reg machine mode
4625   occurs as part of an address.
4626
4627   OPNUM and TYPE specify the purpose of this reload.
4628
4629   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing this machine
4630   supports.
4631
4632   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
4633   to determine if we may generate output reloads, and where to put USEs
4634   for pseudos that we have to replace with stack slots.
4635
4636   Value is nonzero if this address is reloaded or replaced as a whole.
4637   This is interesting to the caller if the address is an autoincrement.
4638
4639   Note that there is no verification that the address will be valid after
4640   this routine does its work.  Instead, we rely on the fact that the address
4641   was valid when reload started.  So we need only undo things that reload
4642   could have broken.  These are wrong register types, pseudos not allocated
4643   to a hard register, and frame pointer elimination.  */
4644
4645static int
4646find_reloads_address (enum machine_mode mode, rtx *memrefloc, rtx ad,
4647		      rtx *loc, int opnum, enum reload_type type,
4648		      int ind_levels, rtx insn)
4649{
4650  int regno;
4651  int removed_and = 0;
4652  rtx tem;
4653
4654  /* If the address is a register, see if it is a legitimate address and
4655     reload if not.  We first handle the cases where we need not reload
4656     or where we must reload in a non-standard way.  */
4657
4658  if (GET_CODE (ad) == REG)
4659    {
4660      regno = REGNO (ad);
4661
4662      /* If the register is equivalent to an invariant expression, substitute
4663	 the invariant, and eliminate any eliminable register references.  */
4664      tem = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
4665      if (tem != 0
4666	  && (tem = eliminate_regs (tem, mode, insn))
4667	  && strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem))
4668	{
4669	  *loc = ad = tem;
4670	  return 0;
4671	}
4672
4673      tem = reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno];
4674      if (tem != 0)
4675	{
4676	  if (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset)
4677	    {
4678	      tem = make_memloc (ad, regno);
4679	      if (! strict_memory_address_p (GET_MODE (tem), XEXP (tem, 0)))
4680		{
4681		  find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
4682					&XEXP (tem, 0), opnum,
4683					ADDR_TYPE (type), ind_levels, insn);
4684		}
4685	      /* We can avoid a reload if the register's equivalent memory
4686		 expression is valid as an indirect memory address.
4687		 But not all addresses are valid in a mem used as an indirect
4688		 address: only reg or reg+constant.  */
4689
4690	      if (ind_levels > 0
4691		  && strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem)
4692		  && (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == REG
4693		      || (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == PLUS
4694			  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0)) == REG
4695			  && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 1)))))
4696		{
4697		  /* TEM is not the same as what we'll be replacing the
4698		     pseudo with after reload, put a USE in front of INSN
4699		     in the final reload pass.  */
4700		  if (replace_reloads
4701		      && num_not_at_initial_offset
4702		      && ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
4703		    {
4704		      *loc = tem;
4705		      /* We mark the USE with QImode so that we
4706			 recognize it as one that can be safely
4707			 deleted at the end of reload.  */
4708		      PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, ad),
4709						  insn), QImode);
4710
4711		      /* This doesn't really count as replacing the address
4712			 as a whole, since it is still a memory access.  */
4713		    }
4714		  return 0;
4715		}
4716	      ad = tem;
4717	    }
4718	}
4719
4720      /* The only remaining case where we can avoid a reload is if this is a
4721	 hard register that is valid as a base register and which is not the
4722	 subject of a CLOBBER in this insn.  */
4723
4724      else if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4725	       && REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode)
4726	       && ! regno_clobbered_p (regno, this_insn, mode, 0))
4727	return 0;
4728
4729      /* If we do not have one of the cases above, we must do the reload.  */
4730      push_reload (ad, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0, MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4731		   GET_MODE (ad), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
4732      return 1;
4733    }
4734
4735  if (strict_memory_address_p (mode, ad))
4736    {
4737      /* The address appears valid, so reloads are not needed.
4738	 But the address may contain an eliminable register.
4739	 This can happen because a machine with indirect addressing
4740	 may consider a pseudo register by itself a valid address even when
4741	 it has failed to get a hard reg.
4742	 So do a tree-walk to find and eliminate all such regs.  */
4743
4744      /* But first quickly dispose of a common case.  */
4745      if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS
4746	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT
4747	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == REG
4748	  && reg_equiv_constant[REGNO (XEXP (ad, 0))] == 0)
4749	return 0;
4750
4751      subst_reg_equivs_changed = 0;
4752      *loc = subst_reg_equivs (ad, insn);
4753
4754      if (! subst_reg_equivs_changed)
4755	return 0;
4756
4757      /* Check result for validity after substitution.  */
4758      if (strict_memory_address_p (mode, ad))
4759	return 0;
4760    }
4761
4762#ifdef LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4763  do
4764    {
4765      if (memrefloc)
4766	{
4767	  LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (ad, GET_MODE (*memrefloc), opnum, type,
4768				     ind_levels, win);
4769	}
4770      break;
4771    win:
4772      *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
4773      XEXP (*memrefloc, 0) = ad;
4774      move_replacements (&ad, &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0));
4775      return 1;
4776    }
4777  while (0);
4778#endif
4779
4780  /* The address is not valid.  We have to figure out why.  First see if
4781     we have an outer AND and remove it if so.  Then analyze what's inside.  */
4782
4783  if (GET_CODE (ad) == AND)
4784    {
4785      removed_and = 1;
4786      loc = &XEXP (ad, 0);
4787      ad = *loc;
4788    }
4789
4790  /* One possibility for why the address is invalid is that it is itself
4791     a MEM.  This can happen when the frame pointer is being eliminated, a
4792     pseudo is not allocated to a hard register, and the offset between the
4793     frame and stack pointers is not its initial value.  In that case the
4794     pseudo will have been replaced by a MEM referring to the
4795     stack pointer.  */
4796  if (GET_CODE (ad) == MEM)
4797    {
4798      /* First ensure that the address in this MEM is valid.  Then, unless
4799	 indirect addresses are valid, reload the MEM into a register.  */
4800      tem = ad;
4801      find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (ad), &tem, XEXP (ad, 0), &XEXP (ad, 0),
4802			    opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type),
4803			    ind_levels == 0 ? 0 : ind_levels - 1, insn);
4804
4805      /* If tem was changed, then we must create a new memory reference to
4806	 hold it and store it back into memrefloc.  */
4807      if (tem != ad && memrefloc)
4808	{
4809	  *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
4810	  copy_replacements (tem, XEXP (*memrefloc, 0));
4811	  loc = &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0);
4812	  if (removed_and)
4813	    loc = &XEXP (*loc, 0);
4814	}
4815
4816      /* Check similar cases as for indirect addresses as above except
4817	 that we can allow pseudos and a MEM since they should have been
4818	 taken care of above.  */
4819
4820      if (ind_levels == 0
4821	  || (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF && ! indirect_symref_ok)
4822	  || GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == MEM
4823	  || ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == REG
4824		|| (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == PLUS
4825		    && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0)) == REG
4826		    && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)))
4827	{
4828	  /* Must use TEM here, not AD, since it is the one that will
4829	     have any subexpressions reloaded, if needed.  */
4830	  push_reload (tem, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
4831		       MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode), GET_MODE (tem),
4832		       VOIDmode, 0,
4833		       0, opnum, type);
4834	  return ! removed_and;
4835	}
4836      else
4837	return 0;
4838    }
4839
4840  /* If we have address of a stack slot but it's not valid because the
4841     displacement is too large, compute the sum in a register.
4842     Handle all base registers here, not just fp/ap/sp, because on some
4843     targets (namely SH) we can also get too large displacements from
4844     big-endian corrections.  */
4845  else if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS
4846	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == REG
4847	   && REGNO (XEXP (ad, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4848	   && REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (XEXP (ad, 0), mode)
4849	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT)
4850    {
4851      /* Unshare the MEM rtx so we can safely alter it.  */
4852      if (memrefloc)
4853	{
4854	  *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
4855	  loc = &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0);
4856	  if (removed_and)
4857	    loc = &XEXP (*loc, 0);
4858	}
4859
4860      if (double_reg_address_ok)
4861	{
4862	  /* Unshare the sum as well.  */
4863	  *loc = ad = copy_rtx (ad);
4864
4865	  /* Reload the displacement into an index reg.
4866	     We assume the frame pointer or arg pointer is a base reg.  */
4867	  find_reloads_address_part (XEXP (ad, 1), &XEXP (ad, 1),
4868				     INDEX_REG_CLASS, GET_MODE (ad), opnum,
4869				     type, ind_levels);
4870	  return 0;
4871	}
4872      else
4873	{
4874	  /* If the sum of two regs is not necessarily valid,
4875	     reload the sum into a base reg.
4876	     That will at least work.  */
4877	  find_reloads_address_part (ad, loc, MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4878				     Pmode, opnum, type, ind_levels);
4879	}
4880      return ! removed_and;
4881    }
4882
4883  /* If we have an indexed stack slot, there are three possible reasons why
4884     it might be invalid: The index might need to be reloaded, the address
4885     might have been made by frame pointer elimination and hence have a
4886     constant out of range, or both reasons might apply.
4887
4888     We can easily check for an index needing reload, but even if that is the
4889     case, we might also have an invalid constant.  To avoid making the
4890     conservative assumption and requiring two reloads, we see if this address
4891     is valid when not interpreted strictly.  If it is, the only problem is
4892     that the index needs a reload and find_reloads_address_1 will take care
4893     of it.
4894
4895     Handle all base registers here, not just fp/ap/sp, because on some
4896     targets (namely SPARC) we can also get invalid addresses from preventive
4897     subreg big-endian corrections made by find_reloads_toplev.
4898
4899     If we decide to do something, it must be that `double_reg_address_ok'
4900     is true.  We generate a reload of the base register + constant and
4901     rework the sum so that the reload register will be added to the index.
4902     This is safe because we know the address isn't shared.
4903
4904     We check for the base register as both the first and second operand of
4905     the innermost PLUS.  */
4906
4907  else if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT
4908	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == PLUS
4909	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0)) == REG
4910	   && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4911	   && (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0), mode)
4912	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == frame_pointer_rtx
4913#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
4914	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
4915#endif
4916#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
4917	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == arg_pointer_rtx
4918#endif
4919	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == stack_pointer_rtx)
4920	   && ! maybe_memory_address_p (mode, ad, &XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1)))
4921    {
4922      *loc = ad = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (ad),
4923				plus_constant (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0),
4924					       INTVAL (XEXP (ad, 1))),
4925				XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1));
4926      find_reloads_address_part (XEXP (ad, 0), &XEXP (ad, 0),
4927				 MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4928				 GET_MODE (ad), opnum, type, ind_levels);
4929      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (ad, 1), 1, &XEXP (ad, 1), opnum,
4930			      type, 0, insn);
4931
4932      return 0;
4933    }
4934
4935  else if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT
4936	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == PLUS
4937	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1)) == REG
4938	   && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4939	   && (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1), mode)
4940	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == frame_pointer_rtx
4941#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
4942	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
4943#endif
4944#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
4945	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == arg_pointer_rtx
4946#endif
4947	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == stack_pointer_rtx)
4948	   && ! maybe_memory_address_p (mode, ad, &XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0)))
4949    {
4950      *loc = ad = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (ad),
4951				XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0),
4952				plus_constant (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1),
4953					       INTVAL (XEXP (ad, 1))));
4954      find_reloads_address_part (XEXP (ad, 1), &XEXP (ad, 1),
4955				 MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4956				 GET_MODE (ad), opnum, type, ind_levels);
4957      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (ad, 0), 1, &XEXP (ad, 0), opnum,
4958			      type, 0, insn);
4959
4960      return 0;
4961    }
4962
4963  /* See if address becomes valid when an eliminable register
4964     in a sum is replaced.  */
4965
4966  tem = ad;
4967  if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS)
4968    tem = subst_indexed_address (ad);
4969  if (tem != ad && strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem))
4970    {
4971      /* Ok, we win that way.  Replace any additional eliminable
4972	 registers.  */
4973
4974      subst_reg_equivs_changed = 0;
4975      tem = subst_reg_equivs (tem, insn);
4976
4977      /* Make sure that didn't make the address invalid again.  */
4978
4979      if (! subst_reg_equivs_changed || strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem))
4980	{
4981	  *loc = tem;
4982	  return 0;
4983	}
4984    }
4985
4986  /* If constants aren't valid addresses, reload the constant address
4987     into a register.  */
4988  if (CONSTANT_P (ad) && ! strict_memory_address_p (mode, ad))
4989    {
4990      /* If AD is an address in the constant pool, the MEM rtx may be shared.
4991	 Unshare it so we can safely alter it.  */
4992      if (memrefloc && GET_CODE (ad) == SYMBOL_REF
4993	  && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (ad))
4994	{
4995	  *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
4996	  loc = &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0);
4997	  if (removed_and)
4998	    loc = &XEXP (*loc, 0);
4999	}
5000
5001      find_reloads_address_part (ad, loc, MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
5002				 Pmode, opnum, type, ind_levels);
5003      return ! removed_and;
5004    }
5005
5006  return find_reloads_address_1 (mode, ad, 0, loc, opnum, type, ind_levels,
5007				 insn);
5008}
5009
5010/* Find all pseudo regs appearing in AD
5011   that are eliminable in favor of equivalent values
5012   and do not have hard regs; replace them by their equivalents.
5013   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  We put USEs in
5014   front of it for pseudos that we have to replace with stack slots.  */
5015
5016static rtx
5017subst_reg_equivs (rtx ad, rtx insn)
5018{
5019  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (ad);
5020  int i;
5021  const char *fmt;
5022
5023  switch (code)
5024    {
5025    case HIGH:
5026    case CONST_INT:
5027    case CONST:
5028    case CONST_DOUBLE:
5029    case CONST_VECTOR:
5030    case SYMBOL_REF:
5031    case LABEL_REF:
5032    case PC:
5033    case CC0:
5034      return ad;
5035
5036    case REG:
5037      {
5038	int regno = REGNO (ad);
5039
5040	if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5041	  {
5042	    subst_reg_equivs_changed = 1;
5043	    return reg_equiv_constant[regno];
5044	  }
5045	if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] && num_not_at_initial_offset)
5046	  {
5047	    rtx mem = make_memloc (ad, regno);
5048	    if (! rtx_equal_p (mem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5049	      {
5050		subst_reg_equivs_changed = 1;
5051		/* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize it
5052		   as one that can be safely deleted at the end of
5053		   reload.  */
5054		PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, ad), insn),
5055			  QImode);
5056		return mem;
5057	      }
5058	  }
5059      }
5060      return ad;
5061
5062    case PLUS:
5063      /* Quickly dispose of a common case.  */
5064      if (XEXP (ad, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx
5065	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT)
5066	return ad;
5067      break;
5068
5069    default:
5070      break;
5071    }
5072
5073  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5074  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
5075    if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5076      XEXP (ad, i) = subst_reg_equivs (XEXP (ad, i), insn);
5077  return ad;
5078}
5079
5080/* Compute the sum of X and Y, making canonicalizations assumed in an
5081   address, namely: sum constant integers, surround the sum of two
5082   constants with a CONST, put the constant as the second operand, and
5083   group the constant on the outermost sum.
5084
5085   This routine assumes both inputs are already in canonical form.  */
5086
5087rtx
5088form_sum (rtx x, rtx y)
5089{
5090  rtx tem;
5091  enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5092
5093  if (mode == VOIDmode)
5094    mode = GET_MODE (y);
5095
5096  if (mode == VOIDmode)
5097    mode = Pmode;
5098
5099  if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT)
5100    return plus_constant (y, INTVAL (x));
5101  else if (GET_CODE (y) == CONST_INT)
5102    return plus_constant (x, INTVAL (y));
5103  else if (CONSTANT_P (x))
5104    tem = x, x = y, y = tem;
5105
5106  if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
5107    return form_sum (XEXP (x, 0), form_sum (XEXP (x, 1), y));
5108
5109  /* Note that if the operands of Y are specified in the opposite
5110     order in the recursive calls below, infinite recursion will occur.  */
5111  if (GET_CODE (y) == PLUS && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (y, 1)))
5112    return form_sum (form_sum (x, XEXP (y, 0)), XEXP (y, 1));
5113
5114  /* If both constant, encapsulate sum.  Otherwise, just form sum.  A
5115     constant will have been placed second.  */
5116  if (CONSTANT_P (x) && CONSTANT_P (y))
5117    {
5118      if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
5119	x = XEXP (x, 0);
5120      if (GET_CODE (y) == CONST)
5121	y = XEXP (y, 0);
5122
5123      return gen_rtx_CONST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, x, y));
5124    }
5125
5126  return gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, x, y);
5127}
5128
5129/* If ADDR is a sum containing a pseudo register that should be
5130   replaced with a constant (from reg_equiv_constant),
5131   return the result of doing so, and also apply the associative
5132   law so that the result is more likely to be a valid address.
5133   (But it is not guaranteed to be one.)
5134
5135   Note that at most one register is replaced, even if more are
5136   replaceable.  Also, we try to put the result into a canonical form
5137   so it is more likely to be a valid address.
5138
5139   In all other cases, return ADDR.  */
5140
5141static rtx
5142subst_indexed_address (rtx addr)
5143{
5144  rtx op0 = 0, op1 = 0, op2 = 0;
5145  rtx tem;
5146  int regno;
5147
5148  if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
5149    {
5150      /* Try to find a register to replace.  */
5151      op0 = XEXP (addr, 0), op1 = XEXP (addr, 1), op2 = 0;
5152      if (GET_CODE (op0) == REG
5153	  && (regno = REGNO (op0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5154	  && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
5155	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5156	op0 = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
5157      else if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG
5158	       && (regno = REGNO (op1)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5159	       && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
5160	       && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5161	op1 = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
5162      else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
5163	       && (tem = subst_indexed_address (op0)) != op0)
5164	op0 = tem;
5165      else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
5166	       && (tem = subst_indexed_address (op1)) != op1)
5167	op1 = tem;
5168      else
5169	return addr;
5170
5171      /* Pick out up to three things to add.  */
5172      if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS)
5173	op2 = XEXP (op1, 1), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
5174      else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS)
5175	op2 = op1, op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
5176
5177      /* Compute the sum.  */
5178      if (op2 != 0)
5179	op1 = form_sum (op1, op2);
5180      if (op1 != 0)
5181	op0 = form_sum (op0, op1);
5182
5183      return op0;
5184    }
5185  return addr;
5186}
5187
5188/* Update the REG_INC notes for an insn.  It updates all REG_INC
5189   notes for the instruction which refer to REGNO the to refer
5190   to the reload number.
5191
5192   INSN is the insn for which any REG_INC notes need updating.
5193
5194   REGNO is the register number which has been reloaded.
5195
5196   RELOADNUM is the reload number.  */
5197
5198static void
5199update_auto_inc_notes (rtx insn ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int regno ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
5200		       int reloadnum ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
5201{
5202#ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
5203  rtx link;
5204
5205  for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
5206    if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
5207        && (int) REGNO (XEXP (link, 0)) == regno)
5208      push_replacement (&XEXP (link, 0), reloadnum, VOIDmode);
5209#endif
5210}
5211
5212/* Record the pseudo registers we must reload into hard registers in a
5213   subexpression of a would-be memory address, X referring to a value
5214   in mode MODE.  (This function is not called if the address we find
5215   is strictly valid.)
5216
5217   CONTEXT = 1 means we are considering regs as index regs,
5218   = 0 means we are considering them as base regs.
5219
5220   OPNUM and TYPE specify the purpose of any reloads made.
5221
5222   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing are
5223   supported at this point in the address.
5224
5225   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
5226   to determine if we may generate output reloads.
5227
5228   We return nonzero if X, as a whole, is reloaded or replaced.  */
5229
5230/* Note that we take shortcuts assuming that no multi-reg machine mode
5231   occurs as part of an address.
5232   Also, this is not fully machine-customizable; it works for machines
5233   such as VAXen and 68000's and 32000's, but other possible machines
5234   could have addressing modes that this does not handle right.  */
5235
5236static int
5237find_reloads_address_1 (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, int context,
5238			rtx *loc, int opnum, enum reload_type type,
5239			int ind_levels, rtx insn)
5240{
5241  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
5242
5243  switch (code)
5244    {
5245    case PLUS:
5246      {
5247	rtx orig_op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
5248	rtx orig_op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5249	RTX_CODE code0 = GET_CODE (orig_op0);
5250	RTX_CODE code1 = GET_CODE (orig_op1);
5251	rtx op0 = orig_op0;
5252	rtx op1 = orig_op1;
5253
5254	if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
5255	  {
5256	    op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
5257	    code0 = GET_CODE (op0);
5258	    if (code0 == REG && REGNO (op0) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5259	      op0 = gen_rtx_REG (word_mode,
5260				 (REGNO (op0) +
5261				  subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (orig_op0)),
5262						       GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (orig_op0)),
5263						       SUBREG_BYTE (orig_op0),
5264						       GET_MODE (orig_op0))));
5265	  }
5266
5267	if (GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG)
5268	  {
5269	    op1 = SUBREG_REG (op1);
5270	    code1 = GET_CODE (op1);
5271	    if (code1 == REG && REGNO (op1) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5272	      /* ??? Why is this given op1's mode and above for
5273		 ??? op0 SUBREGs we use word_mode?  */
5274	      op1 = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (op1),
5275				 (REGNO (op1) +
5276				  subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (orig_op1)),
5277						       GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (orig_op1)),
5278						       SUBREG_BYTE (orig_op1),
5279						       GET_MODE (orig_op1))));
5280	  }
5281	/* Plus in the index register may be created only as a result of
5282	   register remateralization for expression like &localvar*4.  Reload it.
5283	   It may be possible to combine the displacement on the outer level,
5284	   but it is probably not worthwhile to do so.  */
5285	if (context)
5286	  {
5287	    find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), loc, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
5288				  opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type), ind_levels, insn);
5289	    push_reload (*loc, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5290			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5291			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5292	    return 1;
5293	  }
5294
5295	if (code0 == MULT || code0 == SIGN_EXTEND || code0 == TRUNCATE
5296	    || code0 == ZERO_EXTEND || code1 == MEM)
5297	  {
5298	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5299				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5300	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5301				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5302	  }
5303
5304	else if (code1 == MULT || code1 == SIGN_EXTEND || code1 == TRUNCATE
5305		 || code1 == ZERO_EXTEND || code0 == MEM)
5306	  {
5307	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5308				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5309	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 1, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5310				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5311	  }
5312
5313	else if (code0 == CONST_INT || code0 == CONST
5314		 || code0 == SYMBOL_REF || code0 == LABEL_REF)
5315	  find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5316				  type, ind_levels, insn);
5317
5318	else if (code1 == CONST_INT || code1 == CONST
5319		 || code1 == SYMBOL_REF || code1 == LABEL_REF)
5320	  find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5321				  type, ind_levels, insn);
5322
5323	else if (code0 == REG && code1 == REG)
5324	  {
5325	    if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op0)
5326		&& REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op1, mode))
5327	      return 0;
5328	    else if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op1)
5329		     && REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op0, mode))
5330	      return 0;
5331	    else if (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op1, mode))
5332	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5333				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5334	    else if (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op0, mode))
5335	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 1, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5336				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5337	    else if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op1))
5338	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5339				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5340	    else if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op0))
5341	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5342				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5343	    else
5344	      {
5345		find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5346					type, ind_levels, insn);
5347		find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5348					type, ind_levels, insn);
5349	      }
5350	  }
5351
5352	else if (code0 == REG)
5353	  {
5354	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5355				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5356	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5357				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5358	  }
5359
5360	else if (code1 == REG)
5361	  {
5362	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 1, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5363				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5364	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5365				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5366	  }
5367      }
5368
5369      return 0;
5370
5371    case POST_MODIFY:
5372    case PRE_MODIFY:
5373      {
5374	rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
5375	rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5376
5377	if (GET_CODE (op1) != PLUS && GET_CODE (op1) != MINUS)
5378	  return 0;
5379
5380	/* Currently, we only support {PRE,POST}_MODIFY constructs
5381	   where a base register is {inc,dec}remented by the contents
5382	   of another register or by a constant value.  Thus, these
5383	   operands must match.  */
5384	if (op0 != XEXP (op1, 0))
5385	  abort ();
5386
5387	/* Require index register (or constant).  Let's just handle the
5388	   register case in the meantime... If the target allows
5389	   auto-modify by a constant then we could try replacing a pseudo
5390	   register with its equivalent constant where applicable.  */
5391	if (REG_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
5392	  if (!REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (REGNO (XEXP (op1, 1))))
5393	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (op1, 1), 1, &XEXP (op1, 1),
5394				    opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
5395
5396	if (REG_P (XEXP (op1, 0)))
5397	  {
5398	    int regno = REGNO (XEXP (op1, 0));
5399	    int reloadnum;
5400
5401	    /* A register that is incremented cannot be constant!  */
5402	    if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5403		&& reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5404	      abort ();
5405
5406	    /* Handle a register that is equivalent to a memory location
5407	       which cannot be addressed directly.  */
5408	    if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0
5409		&& (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0
5410		    || num_not_at_initial_offset))
5411	      {
5412		rtx tem = make_memloc (XEXP (x, 0), regno);
5413
5414		if (reg_equiv_address[regno]
5415		    || ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5416		  {
5417		    /* First reload the memory location's address.
5418		       We can't use ADDR_TYPE (type) here, because we need to
5419		       write back the value after reading it, hence we actually
5420		       need two registers.  */
5421		    find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
5422					  &XEXP (tem, 0), opnum,
5423					  RELOAD_OTHER,
5424					  ind_levels, insn);
5425
5426		    /* Then reload the memory location into a base
5427		       register.  */
5428		    reloadnum = push_reload (tem, tem, &XEXP (x, 0),
5429					     &XEXP (op1, 0),
5430					     MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
5431					     GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0,
5432					     0, opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
5433
5434		    update_auto_inc_notes (this_insn, regno, reloadnum);
5435		    return 0;
5436		  }
5437	      }
5438
5439	    if (reg_renumber[regno] >= 0)
5440	      regno = reg_renumber[regno];
5441
5442	    /* We require a base register here...  */
5443	    if (!REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, GET_MODE (x)))
5444	      {
5445		reloadnum = push_reload (XEXP (op1, 0), XEXP (x, 0),
5446					 &XEXP (op1, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
5447					 MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
5448					 GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0, 0,
5449					 opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
5450
5451		update_auto_inc_notes (this_insn, regno, reloadnum);
5452		return 0;
5453	      }
5454	  }
5455	else
5456	  abort ();
5457      }
5458      return 0;
5459
5460    case POST_INC:
5461    case POST_DEC:
5462    case PRE_INC:
5463    case PRE_DEC:
5464      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG)
5465	{
5466	  int regno = REGNO (XEXP (x, 0));
5467	  int value = 0;
5468	  rtx x_orig = x;
5469
5470	  /* A register that is incremented cannot be constant!  */
5471	  if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5472	      && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5473	    abort ();
5474
5475	  /* Handle a register that is equivalent to a memory location
5476	     which cannot be addressed directly.  */
5477	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0
5478	      && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
5479	    {
5480	      rtx tem = make_memloc (XEXP (x, 0), regno);
5481	      if (reg_equiv_address[regno]
5482		  || ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5483		{
5484		  /* First reload the memory location's address.
5485		     We can't use ADDR_TYPE (type) here, because we need to
5486		     write back the value after reading it, hence we actually
5487		     need two registers.  */
5488		  find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
5489					&XEXP (tem, 0), opnum, type,
5490					ind_levels, insn);
5491		  /* Put this inside a new increment-expression.  */
5492		  x = gen_rtx_fmt_e (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), tem);
5493		  /* Proceed to reload that, as if it contained a register.  */
5494		}
5495	    }
5496
5497	  /* If we have a hard register that is ok as an index,
5498	     don't make a reload.  If an autoincrement of a nice register
5499	     isn't "valid", it must be that no autoincrement is "valid".
5500	     If that is true and something made an autoincrement anyway,
5501	     this must be a special context where one is allowed.
5502	     (For example, a "push" instruction.)
5503	     We can't improve this address, so leave it alone.  */
5504
5505	  /* Otherwise, reload the autoincrement into a suitable hard reg
5506	     and record how much to increment by.  */
5507
5508	  if (reg_renumber[regno] >= 0)
5509	    regno = reg_renumber[regno];
5510	  if ((regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5511	       || !(context ? REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (regno)
5512		    : REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode))))
5513	    {
5514	      int reloadnum;
5515
5516	      /* If we can output the register afterwards, do so, this
5517		 saves the extra update.
5518		 We can do so if we have an INSN - i.e. no JUMP_INSN nor
5519		 CALL_INSN - and it does not set CC0.
5520		 But don't do this if we cannot directly address the
5521		 memory location, since this will make it harder to
5522		 reuse address reloads, and increases register pressure.
5523		 Also don't do this if we can probably update x directly.  */
5524	      rtx equiv = (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM
5525			   ? XEXP (x, 0)
5526			   : reg_equiv_mem[regno]);
5527	      int icode = (int) add_optab->handlers[(int) Pmode].insn_code;
5528	      if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == INSN && equiv
5529		  && memory_operand (equiv, GET_MODE (equiv))
5530#ifdef HAVE_cc0
5531		  && ! sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (insn))
5532#endif
5533		  && ! (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
5534			&& ((*insn_data[icode].operand[0].predicate)
5535			    (equiv, Pmode))
5536			&& ((*insn_data[icode].operand[1].predicate)
5537			    (equiv, Pmode))))
5538		{
5539		  /* We use the original pseudo for loc, so that
5540		     emit_reload_insns() knows which pseudo this
5541		     reload refers to and updates the pseudo rtx, not
5542		     its equivalent memory location, as well as the
5543		     corresponding entry in reg_last_reload_reg.  */
5544		  loc = &XEXP (x_orig, 0);
5545		  x = XEXP (x, 0);
5546		  reloadnum
5547		    = push_reload (x, x, loc, loc,
5548				   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5549				    MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5550				   GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0, 0,
5551				   opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
5552		}
5553	      else
5554		{
5555		  reloadnum
5556		    = push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5557				   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5558				    MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5559				   GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0, 0,
5560				   opnum, type);
5561		  rld[reloadnum].inc
5562		    = find_inc_amount (PATTERN (this_insn), XEXP (x_orig, 0));
5563
5564		  value = 1;
5565		}
5566
5567	      update_auto_inc_notes (this_insn, REGNO (XEXP (x_orig, 0)),
5568				     reloadnum);
5569	    }
5570	  return value;
5571	}
5572
5573      else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
5574	{
5575	  /* This is probably the result of a substitution, by eliminate_regs,
5576	     of an equivalent address for a pseudo that was not allocated to a
5577	     hard register.  Verify that the specified address is valid and
5578	     reload it into a register.  */
5579	  /* Variable `tem' might or might not be used in FIND_REG_INC_NOTE.  */
5580	  rtx tem ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED = XEXP (x, 0);
5581	  rtx link;
5582	  int reloadnum;
5583
5584	  /* Since we know we are going to reload this item, don't decrement
5585	     for the indirection level.
5586
5587	     Note that this is actually conservative:  it would be slightly
5588	     more efficient to use the value of SPILL_INDIRECT_LEVELS from
5589	     reload1.c here.  */
5590	  /* We can't use ADDR_TYPE (type) here, because we need to
5591	     write back the value after reading it, hence we actually
5592	     need two registers.  */
5593	  find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &XEXP (x, 0),
5594				XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5595				opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
5596
5597	  reloadnum = push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5598				   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5599				    MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5600				   GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5601	  rld[reloadnum].inc
5602	    = find_inc_amount (PATTERN (this_insn), XEXP (x, 0));
5603
5604	  link = FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (this_insn, tem);
5605	  if (link != 0)
5606	    push_replacement (&XEXP (link, 0), reloadnum, VOIDmode);
5607
5608	  return 1;
5609	}
5610      return 0;
5611
5612    case MEM:
5613      /* This is probably the result of a substitution, by eliminate_regs, of
5614	 an equivalent address for a pseudo that was not allocated to a hard
5615	 register.  Verify that the specified address is valid and reload it
5616	 into a register.
5617
5618	 Since we know we are going to reload this item, don't decrement for
5619	 the indirection level.
5620
5621	 Note that this is actually conservative:  it would be slightly more
5622	 efficient to use the value of SPILL_INDIRECT_LEVELS from
5623	 reload1.c here.  */
5624
5625      find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), loc, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
5626			    opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type), ind_levels, insn);
5627      push_reload (*loc, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5628		   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5629		   GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5630      return 1;
5631
5632    case REG:
5633      {
5634	int regno = REGNO (x);
5635
5636	if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5637	  {
5638	    find_reloads_address_part (reg_equiv_constant[regno], loc,
5639				       (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5640					MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5641				       GET_MODE (x), opnum, type, ind_levels);
5642	    return 1;
5643	  }
5644
5645#if 0 /* This might screw code in reload1.c to delete prior output-reload
5646	 that feeds this insn.  */
5647	if (reg_equiv_mem[regno] != 0)
5648	  {
5649	    push_reload (reg_equiv_mem[regno], NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5650			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5651			  MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5652			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5653	    return 1;
5654	  }
5655#endif
5656
5657	if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno]
5658	    && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
5659	  {
5660	    rtx tem = make_memloc (x, regno);
5661	    if (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0
5662		|| ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5663	      {
5664		x = tem;
5665		find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &x, XEXP (x, 0),
5666				      &XEXP (x, 0), opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type),
5667				      ind_levels, insn);
5668	      }
5669	  }
5670
5671	if (reg_renumber[regno] >= 0)
5672	  regno = reg_renumber[regno];
5673
5674	if ((regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5675	     || !(context ? REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (regno)
5676		  : REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode))))
5677	  {
5678	    push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5679			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5680			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5681	    return 1;
5682	  }
5683
5684	/* If a register appearing in an address is the subject of a CLOBBER
5685	   in this insn, reload it into some other register to be safe.
5686	   The CLOBBER is supposed to make the register unavailable
5687	   from before this insn to after it.  */
5688	if (regno_clobbered_p (regno, this_insn, GET_MODE (x), 0))
5689	  {
5690	    push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5691			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5692			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5693	    return 1;
5694	  }
5695      }
5696      return 0;
5697
5698    case SUBREG:
5699      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG)
5700	{
5701	  /* If this is a SUBREG of a hard register and the resulting register
5702	     is of the wrong class, reload the whole SUBREG.  This avoids
5703	     needless copies if SUBREG_REG is multi-word.  */
5704	  if (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5705	    {
5706	      int regno ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED = subreg_regno (x);
5707
5708	      if (! (context ? REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (regno)
5709		     : REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode)))
5710		{
5711		  push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5712			       (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5713				MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5714			       GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5715		  return 1;
5716		}
5717	    }
5718	  /* If this is a SUBREG of a pseudo-register, and the pseudo-register
5719	     is larger than the class size, then reload the whole SUBREG.  */
5720	  else
5721	    {
5722	      enum reg_class class = (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS
5723				      : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode));
5724	      if ((unsigned) CLASS_MAX_NREGS (class, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))
5725		  > reg_class_size[class])
5726		{
5727		  x = find_reloads_subreg_address (x, 0, opnum, type,
5728						   ind_levels, insn);
5729		  push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0, class,
5730			       GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5731		  return 1;
5732		}
5733	    }
5734	}
5735      break;
5736
5737    default:
5738      break;
5739    }
5740
5741  {
5742    const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5743    int i;
5744
5745    for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
5746      {
5747	if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5748	  find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (x, i), context, &XEXP (x, i),
5749				  opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
5750      }
5751  }
5752
5753  return 0;
5754}
5755
5756/* X, which is found at *LOC, is a part of an address that needs to be
5757   reloaded into a register of class CLASS.  If X is a constant, or if
5758   X is a PLUS that contains a constant, check that the constant is a
5759   legitimate operand and that we are supposed to be able to load
5760   it into the register.
5761
5762   If not, force the constant into memory and reload the MEM instead.
5763
5764   MODE is the mode to use, in case X is an integer constant.
5765
5766   OPNUM and TYPE describe the purpose of any reloads made.
5767
5768   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing this machine
5769   supports.  */
5770
5771static void
5772find_reloads_address_part (rtx x, rtx *loc, enum reg_class class,
5773			   enum machine_mode mode, int opnum,
5774			   enum reload_type type, int ind_levels)
5775{
5776  if (CONSTANT_P (x)
5777      && (! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x)
5778	  || PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (x, class) == NO_REGS))
5779    {
5780      rtx tem;
5781
5782      tem = x = force_const_mem (mode, x);
5783      find_reloads_address (mode, &tem, XEXP (tem, 0), &XEXP (tem, 0),
5784			    opnum, type, ind_levels, 0);
5785    }
5786
5787  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
5788	   && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5789	   && (! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5790	       || PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (XEXP (x, 1), class) == NO_REGS))
5791    {
5792      rtx tem;
5793
5794      tem = force_const_mem (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 1));
5795      x = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0), tem);
5796      find_reloads_address (mode, &tem, XEXP (tem, 0), &XEXP (tem, 0),
5797			    opnum, type, ind_levels, 0);
5798    }
5799
5800  push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0, class,
5801	       mode, VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5802}
5803
5804/* X, a subreg of a pseudo, is a part of an address that needs to be
5805   reloaded.
5806
5807   If the pseudo is equivalent to a memory location that cannot be directly
5808   addressed, make the necessary address reloads.
5809
5810   If address reloads have been necessary, or if the address is changed
5811   by register elimination, return the rtx of the memory location;
5812   otherwise, return X.
5813
5814   If FORCE_REPLACE is nonzero, unconditionally replace the subreg with the
5815   memory location.
5816
5817   OPNUM and TYPE identify the purpose of the reload.
5818
5819   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing are
5820   supported at this point in the address.
5821
5822   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
5823   to determine where to put USEs for pseudos that we have to replace with
5824   stack slots.  */
5825
5826static rtx
5827find_reloads_subreg_address (rtx x, int force_replace, int opnum,
5828			     enum reload_type type, int ind_levels, rtx insn)
5829{
5830  int regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
5831
5832  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno])
5833    {
5834      /* If the address is not directly addressable, or if the address is not
5835	 offsettable, then it must be replaced.  */
5836      if (! force_replace
5837	  && (reg_equiv_address[regno]
5838	      || ! offsettable_memref_p (reg_equiv_mem[regno])))
5839	force_replace = 1;
5840
5841      if (force_replace || num_not_at_initial_offset)
5842	{
5843	  rtx tem = make_memloc (SUBREG_REG (x), regno);
5844
5845	  /* If the address changes because of register elimination, then
5846	     it must be replaced.  */
5847	  if (force_replace
5848	      || ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5849	    {
5850	      unsigned outer_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
5851	      unsigned inner_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
5852	      int offset;
5853
5854	      /* For big-endian paradoxical subregs, SUBREG_BYTE does not
5855		 hold the correct (negative) byte offset.  */
5856	      if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && outer_size > inner_size)
5857		offset = inner_size - outer_size;
5858	      else
5859		offset = SUBREG_BYTE (x);
5860
5861	      XEXP (tem, 0) = plus_constant (XEXP (tem, 0), offset);
5862	      PUT_MODE (tem, GET_MODE (x));
5863
5864	      /* If this was a paradoxical subreg that we replaced, the
5865		 resulting memory must be sufficiently aligned to allow
5866		 us to widen the mode of the memory.  */
5867	      if (outer_size > inner_size && STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
5868		{
5869		  rtx base;
5870
5871		  base = XEXP (tem, 0);
5872		  if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS)
5873		    {
5874		      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
5875			  && INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1)) % outer_size != 0)
5876			return x;
5877		      base = XEXP (base, 0);
5878		    }
5879		  if (GET_CODE (base) != REG
5880		      || (REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (REGNO (base))
5881			  < outer_size * BITS_PER_UNIT))
5882		    return x;
5883		}
5884
5885	      find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
5886				    &XEXP (tem, 0), opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type),
5887				    ind_levels, insn);
5888
5889	      /* If this is not a toplevel operand, find_reloads doesn't see
5890		 this substitution.  We have to emit a USE of the pseudo so
5891		 that delete_output_reload can see it.  */
5892	      if (replace_reloads && recog_data.operand[opnum] != x)
5893		/* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize it
5894		   as one that can be safely deleted at the end of
5895		   reload.  */
5896		PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode,
5897							 SUBREG_REG (x)),
5898					    insn), QImode);
5899	      x = tem;
5900	    }
5901	}
5902    }
5903  return x;
5904}
5905
5906/* Substitute into the current INSN the registers into which we have reloaded
5907   the things that need reloading.  The array `replacements'
5908   contains the locations of all pointers that must be changed
5909   and says what to replace them with.
5910
5911   Return the rtx that X translates into; usually X, but modified.  */
5912
5913void
5914subst_reloads (rtx insn)
5915{
5916  int i;
5917
5918  for (i = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
5919    {
5920      struct replacement *r = &replacements[i];
5921      rtx reloadreg = rld[r->what].reg_rtx;
5922      if (reloadreg)
5923	{
5924#ifdef ENABLE_CHECKING
5925	  /* Internal consistency test.  Check that we don't modify
5926	     anything in the equivalence arrays.  Whenever something from
5927	     those arrays needs to be reloaded, it must be unshared before
5928	     being substituted into; the equivalence must not be modified.
5929	     Otherwise, if the equivalence is used after that, it will
5930	     have been modified, and the thing substituted (probably a
5931	     register) is likely overwritten and not a usable equivalence.  */
5932	  int check_regno;
5933
5934	  for (check_regno = 0; check_regno < max_regno; check_regno++)
5935	    {
5936#define CHECK_MODF(ARRAY)						\
5937	      if (ARRAY[check_regno]					\
5938		  && loc_mentioned_in_p (r->where,			\
5939					 ARRAY[check_regno]))		\
5940		abort ()
5941
5942	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_constant);
5943	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_memory_loc);
5944	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_address);
5945	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_mem);
5946#undef CHECK_MODF
5947	    }
5948#endif /* ENABLE_CHECKING */
5949
5950	  /* If we're replacing a LABEL_REF with a register, add a
5951	     REG_LABEL note to indicate to flow which label this
5952	     register refers to.  */
5953	  if (GET_CODE (*r->where) == LABEL_REF
5954	      && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
5955	    REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_INSN_LIST (REG_LABEL,
5956						  XEXP (*r->where, 0),
5957						  REG_NOTES (insn));
5958
5959	  /* Encapsulate RELOADREG so its machine mode matches what
5960	     used to be there.  Note that gen_lowpart_common will
5961	     do the wrong thing if RELOADREG is multi-word.  RELOADREG
5962	     will always be a REG here.  */
5963	  if (GET_MODE (reloadreg) != r->mode && r->mode != VOIDmode)
5964	    reloadreg = reload_adjust_reg_for_mode (reloadreg, r->mode);
5965
5966	  /* If we are putting this into a SUBREG and RELOADREG is a
5967	     SUBREG, we would be making nested SUBREGs, so we have to fix
5968	     this up.  Note that r->where == &SUBREG_REG (*r->subreg_loc).  */
5969
5970	  if (r->subreg_loc != 0 && GET_CODE (reloadreg) == SUBREG)
5971	    {
5972	      if (GET_MODE (*r->subreg_loc)
5973		  == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (reloadreg)))
5974		*r->subreg_loc = SUBREG_REG (reloadreg);
5975	      else
5976		{
5977		  int final_offset =
5978		    SUBREG_BYTE (*r->subreg_loc) + SUBREG_BYTE (reloadreg);
5979
5980		  /* When working with SUBREGs the rule is that the byte
5981		     offset must be a multiple of the SUBREG's mode.  */
5982		  final_offset = (final_offset /
5983				  GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*r->subreg_loc)));
5984		  final_offset = (final_offset *
5985				  GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*r->subreg_loc)));
5986
5987		  *r->where = SUBREG_REG (reloadreg);
5988		  SUBREG_BYTE (*r->subreg_loc) = final_offset;
5989		}
5990	    }
5991	  else
5992	    *r->where = reloadreg;
5993	}
5994      /* If reload got no reg and isn't optional, something's wrong.  */
5995      else if (! rld[r->what].optional)
5996	abort ();
5997    }
5998}
5999
6000/* Make a copy of any replacements being done into X and move those
6001   copies to locations in Y, a copy of X.  */
6002
6003void
6004copy_replacements (rtx x, rtx y)
6005{
6006  /* We can't support X being a SUBREG because we might then need to know its
6007     location if something inside it was replaced.  */
6008  if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
6009    abort ();
6010
6011  copy_replacements_1 (&x, &y, n_replacements);
6012}
6013
6014static void
6015copy_replacements_1 (rtx *px, rtx *py, int orig_replacements)
6016{
6017  int i, j;
6018  rtx x, y;
6019  struct replacement *r;
6020  enum rtx_code code;
6021  const char *fmt;
6022
6023  for (j = 0; j < orig_replacements; j++)
6024    {
6025      if (replacements[j].subreg_loc == px)
6026	{
6027	  r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
6028	  r->where = replacements[j].where;
6029	  r->subreg_loc = py;
6030	  r->what = replacements[j].what;
6031	  r->mode = replacements[j].mode;
6032	}
6033      else if (replacements[j].where == px)
6034	{
6035	  r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
6036	  r->where = py;
6037	  r->subreg_loc = 0;
6038	  r->what = replacements[j].what;
6039	  r->mode = replacements[j].mode;
6040	}
6041    }
6042
6043  x = *px;
6044  y = *py;
6045  code = GET_CODE (x);
6046  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6047
6048  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6049    {
6050      if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6051	copy_replacements_1 (&XEXP (x, i), &XEXP (y, i), orig_replacements);
6052      else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6053	for (j = XVECLEN (x, i); --j >= 0; )
6054	  copy_replacements_1 (&XVECEXP (x, i, j), &XVECEXP (y, i, j),
6055			       orig_replacements);
6056    }
6057}
6058
6059/* Change any replacements being done to *X to be done to *Y.  */
6060
6061void
6062move_replacements (rtx *x, rtx *y)
6063{
6064  int i;
6065
6066  for (i = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
6067    if (replacements[i].subreg_loc == x)
6068      replacements[i].subreg_loc = y;
6069    else if (replacements[i].where == x)
6070      {
6071	replacements[i].where = y;
6072	replacements[i].subreg_loc = 0;
6073      }
6074}
6075
6076/* If LOC was scheduled to be replaced by something, return the replacement.
6077   Otherwise, return *LOC.  */
6078
6079rtx
6080find_replacement (rtx *loc)
6081{
6082  struct replacement *r;
6083
6084  for (r = &replacements[0]; r < &replacements[n_replacements]; r++)
6085    {
6086      rtx reloadreg = rld[r->what].reg_rtx;
6087
6088      if (reloadreg && r->where == loc)
6089	{
6090	  if (r->mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (reloadreg) != r->mode)
6091	    reloadreg = gen_rtx_REG (r->mode, REGNO (reloadreg));
6092
6093	  return reloadreg;
6094	}
6095      else if (reloadreg && r->subreg_loc == loc)
6096	{
6097	  /* RELOADREG must be either a REG or a SUBREG.
6098
6099	     ??? Is it actually still ever a SUBREG?  If so, why?  */
6100
6101	  if (GET_CODE (reloadreg) == REG)
6102	    return gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (*loc),
6103				(REGNO (reloadreg) +
6104				 subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (*loc)),
6105						      GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (*loc)),
6106						      SUBREG_BYTE (*loc),
6107						      GET_MODE (*loc))));
6108	  else if (GET_MODE (reloadreg) == GET_MODE (*loc))
6109	    return reloadreg;
6110	  else
6111	    {
6112	      int final_offset = SUBREG_BYTE (reloadreg) + SUBREG_BYTE (*loc);
6113
6114	      /* When working with SUBREGs the rule is that the byte
6115		 offset must be a multiple of the SUBREG's mode.  */
6116	      final_offset = (final_offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*loc)));
6117	      final_offset = (final_offset * GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*loc)));
6118	      return gen_rtx_SUBREG (GET_MODE (*loc), SUBREG_REG (reloadreg),
6119				     final_offset);
6120	    }
6121	}
6122    }
6123
6124  /* If *LOC is a PLUS, MINUS, or MULT, see if a replacement is scheduled for
6125     what's inside and make a new rtl if so.  */
6126  if (GET_CODE (*loc) == PLUS || GET_CODE (*loc) == MINUS
6127      || GET_CODE (*loc) == MULT)
6128    {
6129      rtx x = find_replacement (&XEXP (*loc, 0));
6130      rtx y = find_replacement (&XEXP (*loc, 1));
6131
6132      if (x != XEXP (*loc, 0) || y != XEXP (*loc, 1))
6133	return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (*loc), GET_MODE (*loc), x, y);
6134    }
6135
6136  return *loc;
6137}
6138
6139/* Return nonzero if register in range [REGNO, ENDREGNO)
6140   appears either explicitly or implicitly in X
6141   other than being stored into (except for earlyclobber operands).
6142
6143   References contained within the substructure at LOC do not count.
6144   LOC may be zero, meaning don't ignore anything.
6145
6146   This is similar to refers_to_regno_p in rtlanal.c except that we
6147   look at equivalences for pseudos that didn't get hard registers.  */
6148
6149int
6150refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (unsigned int regno, unsigned int endregno,
6151			      rtx x, rtx *loc)
6152{
6153  int i;
6154  unsigned int r;
6155  RTX_CODE code;
6156  const char *fmt;
6157
6158  if (x == 0)
6159    return 0;
6160
6161 repeat:
6162  code = GET_CODE (x);
6163
6164  switch (code)
6165    {
6166    case REG:
6167      r = REGNO (x);
6168
6169      /* If this is a pseudo, a hard register must not have been allocated.
6170	 X must therefore either be a constant or be in memory.  */
6171      if (r >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6172	{
6173	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[r])
6174	    return refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6175						 reg_equiv_memory_loc[r],
6176						 (rtx*) 0);
6177
6178	  if (reg_equiv_constant[r])
6179	    return 0;
6180
6181	  abort ();
6182	}
6183
6184      return (endregno > r
6185	      && regno < r + (r < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6186			      ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (r, GET_MODE (x))
6187			      : 1));
6188
6189    case SUBREG:
6190      /* If this is a SUBREG of a hard reg, we can see exactly which
6191	 registers are being modified.  Otherwise, handle normally.  */
6192      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
6193	  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6194	{
6195	  unsigned int inner_regno = subreg_regno (x);
6196	  unsigned int inner_endregno
6197	    = inner_regno + (inner_regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6198			     ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)) : 1);
6199
6200	  return endregno > inner_regno && regno < inner_endregno;
6201	}
6202      break;
6203
6204    case CLOBBER:
6205    case SET:
6206      if (&SET_DEST (x) != loc
6207	  /* Note setting a SUBREG counts as referring to the REG it is in for
6208	     a pseudo but not for hard registers since we can
6209	     treat each word individually.  */
6210	  && ((GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
6211	       && loc != &SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))
6212	       && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))) == REG
6213	       && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6214	       && refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6215						SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)),
6216						loc))
6217	      /* If the output is an earlyclobber operand, this is
6218		 a conflict.  */
6219	      || ((GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG
6220		   || earlyclobber_operand_p (SET_DEST (x)))
6221		  && refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6222						   SET_DEST (x), loc))))
6223	return 1;
6224
6225      if (code == CLOBBER || loc == &SET_SRC (x))
6226	return 0;
6227      x = SET_SRC (x);
6228      goto repeat;
6229
6230    default:
6231      break;
6232    }
6233
6234  /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions.  */
6235
6236  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6237  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6238    {
6239      if (fmt[i] == 'e' && loc != &XEXP (x, i))
6240	{
6241	  if (i == 0)
6242	    {
6243	      x = XEXP (x, 0);
6244	      goto repeat;
6245	    }
6246	  else
6247	    if (refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6248					      XEXP (x, i), loc))
6249	      return 1;
6250	}
6251      else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6252	{
6253	  int j;
6254	  for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6255	    if (loc != &XVECEXP (x, i, j)
6256		&& refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6257						 XVECEXP (x, i, j), loc))
6258	      return 1;
6259	}
6260    }
6261  return 0;
6262}
6263
6264/* Nonzero if modifying X will affect IN.  If X is a register or a SUBREG,
6265   we check if any register number in X conflicts with the relevant register
6266   numbers.  If X is a constant, return 0.  If X is a MEM, return 1 iff IN
6267   contains a MEM (we don't bother checking for memory addresses that can't
6268   conflict because we expect this to be a rare case.
6269
6270   This function is similar to reg_overlap_mentioned_p in rtlanal.c except
6271   that we look at equivalences for pseudos that didn't get hard registers.  */
6272
6273int
6274reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (rtx x, rtx in)
6275{
6276  int regno, endregno;
6277
6278  /* Overly conservative.  */
6279  if (GET_CODE (x) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6280      || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == 'a')
6281    x = XEXP (x, 0);
6282
6283  /* If either argument is a constant, then modifying X can not affect IN.  */
6284  if (CONSTANT_P (x) || CONSTANT_P (in))
6285    return 0;
6286  else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
6287    {
6288      regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
6289      if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6290	regno += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)),
6291				      GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
6292				      SUBREG_BYTE (x),
6293				      GET_MODE (x));
6294    }
6295  else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
6296    {
6297      regno = REGNO (x);
6298
6299      /* If this is a pseudo, it must not have been assigned a hard register.
6300	 Therefore, it must either be in memory or be a constant.  */
6301
6302      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6303	{
6304	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno])
6305	    return refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (in);
6306	  else if (reg_equiv_constant[regno])
6307	    return 0;
6308	  abort ();
6309	}
6310    }
6311  else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
6312    return refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (in);
6313  else if (GET_CODE (x) == SCRATCH || GET_CODE (x) == PC
6314	   || GET_CODE (x) == CC0)
6315    return reg_mentioned_p (x, in);
6316  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS)
6317    {
6318      /* We actually want to know if X is mentioned somewhere inside IN.
6319	 We must not say that (plus (sp) (const_int 124)) is in
6320	 (plus (sp) (const_int 64)), since that can lead to incorrect reload
6321	 allocation when spuriously changing a RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
6322	 into a RELOAD_OTHER on behalf of another RELOAD_OTHER.  */
6323      while (GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
6324	in = XEXP (in, 0);
6325      if (GET_CODE (in) == REG)
6326	return 0;
6327      else if (GET_CODE (in) == PLUS)
6328	return (reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (x, XEXP (in, 0))
6329		|| reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (x, XEXP (in, 1)));
6330      else return (reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (x, 0), in)
6331		   || reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (x, 1), in));
6332    }
6333  else
6334    abort ();
6335
6336  endregno = regno + (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6337		      ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)) : 1);
6338
6339  return refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno, in, (rtx*) 0);
6340}
6341
6342/* Return nonzero if anything in X contains a MEM.  Look also for pseudo
6343   registers.  */
6344
6345int
6346refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (rtx x)
6347{
6348  const char *fmt;
6349  int i;
6350
6351  if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
6352    return 1;
6353
6354  if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
6355    return (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6356	    && reg_equiv_memory_loc[REGNO (x)]);
6357
6358  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
6359  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6360    if (fmt[i] == 'e'
6361	&& (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == MEM
6362	    || refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (XEXP (x, i))))
6363      return 1;
6364
6365  return 0;
6366}
6367
6368/* Check the insns before INSN to see if there is a suitable register
6369   containing the same value as GOAL.
6370   If OTHER is -1, look for a register in class CLASS.
6371   Otherwise, just see if register number OTHER shares GOAL's value.
6372
6373   Return an rtx for the register found, or zero if none is found.
6374
6375   If RELOAD_REG_P is (short *)1,
6376   we reject any hard reg that appears in reload_reg_rtx
6377   because such a hard reg is also needed coming into this insn.
6378
6379   If RELOAD_REG_P is any other nonzero value,
6380   it is a vector indexed by hard reg number
6381   and we reject any hard reg whose element in the vector is nonnegative
6382   as well as any that appears in reload_reg_rtx.
6383
6384   If GOAL is zero, then GOALREG is a register number; we look
6385   for an equivalent for that register.
6386
6387   MODE is the machine mode of the value we want an equivalence for.
6388   If GOAL is nonzero and not VOIDmode, then it must have mode MODE.
6389
6390   This function is used by jump.c as well as in the reload pass.
6391
6392   If GOAL is the sum of the stack pointer and a constant, we treat it
6393   as if it were a constant except that sp is required to be unchanging.  */
6394
6395rtx
6396find_equiv_reg (rtx goal, rtx insn, enum reg_class class, int other,
6397		short *reload_reg_p, int goalreg, enum machine_mode mode)
6398{
6399  rtx p = insn;
6400  rtx goaltry, valtry, value, where;
6401  rtx pat;
6402  int regno = -1;
6403  int valueno;
6404  int goal_mem = 0;
6405  int goal_const = 0;
6406  int goal_mem_addr_varies = 0;
6407  int need_stable_sp = 0;
6408  int nregs;
6409  int valuenregs;
6410  int num = 0;
6411
6412  if (goal == 0)
6413    regno = goalreg;
6414  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == REG)
6415    regno = REGNO (goal);
6416  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == MEM)
6417    {
6418      enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (XEXP (goal, 0));
6419      if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (goal))
6420	return 0;
6421      if (flag_float_store && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (goal)) == MODE_FLOAT)
6422	return 0;
6423      /* An address with side effects must be reexecuted.  */
6424      switch (code)
6425	{
6426	case POST_INC:
6427	case PRE_INC:
6428	case POST_DEC:
6429	case PRE_DEC:
6430	case POST_MODIFY:
6431	case PRE_MODIFY:
6432	  return 0;
6433	default:
6434	  break;
6435	}
6436      goal_mem = 1;
6437    }
6438  else if (CONSTANT_P (goal))
6439    goal_const = 1;
6440  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == PLUS
6441	   && XEXP (goal, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
6442	   && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (goal, 1)))
6443    goal_const = need_stable_sp = 1;
6444  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == PLUS
6445	   && XEXP (goal, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx
6446	   && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (goal, 1)))
6447    goal_const = 1;
6448  else
6449    return 0;
6450
6451  num = 0;
6452  /* Scan insns back from INSN, looking for one that copies
6453     a value into or out of GOAL.
6454     Stop and give up if we reach a label.  */
6455
6456  while (1)
6457    {
6458      p = PREV_INSN (p);
6459      num++;
6460      if (p == 0 || GET_CODE (p) == CODE_LABEL
6461	  || num > PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_RELOAD_SEARCH_INSNS))
6462	return 0;
6463
6464      if (GET_CODE (p) == INSN
6465	  /* If we don't want spill regs ...  */
6466	  && (! (reload_reg_p != 0
6467		 && reload_reg_p != (short *) (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1)
6468	      /* ... then ignore insns introduced by reload; they aren't
6469		 useful and can cause results in reload_as_needed to be
6470		 different from what they were when calculating the need for
6471		 spills.  If we notice an input-reload insn here, we will
6472		 reject it below, but it might hide a usable equivalent.
6473		 That makes bad code.  It may even abort: perhaps no reg was
6474		 spilled for this insn because it was assumed we would find
6475		 that equivalent.  */
6476	      || INSN_UID (p) < reload_first_uid))
6477	{
6478	  rtx tem;
6479	  pat = single_set (p);
6480
6481	  /* First check for something that sets some reg equal to GOAL.  */
6482	  if (pat != 0
6483	      && ((regno >= 0
6484		   && true_regnum (SET_SRC (pat)) == regno
6485		   && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0)
6486		  ||
6487		  (regno >= 0
6488		   && true_regnum (SET_DEST (pat)) == regno
6489		   && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_SRC (pat))) >= 0)
6490		  ||
6491		  (goal_const && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (pat), goal)
6492		   /* When looking for stack pointer + const,
6493		      make sure we don't use a stack adjust.  */
6494		   && !reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (SET_DEST (pat), goal)
6495		   && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0)
6496		  || (goal_mem
6497		      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0
6498		      && rtx_renumbered_equal_p (goal, SET_SRC (pat)))
6499		  || (goal_mem
6500		      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_SRC (pat))) >= 0
6501		      && rtx_renumbered_equal_p (goal, SET_DEST (pat)))
6502		  /* If we are looking for a constant,
6503		     and something equivalent to that constant was copied
6504		     into a reg, we can use that reg.  */
6505		  || (goal_const && REG_NOTES (p) != 0
6506		      && (tem = find_reg_note (p, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX))
6507		      && ((rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), goal)
6508			   && (valueno
6509			       = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0)
6510			  || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) == REG
6511			      && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CONST_DOUBLE
6512			      && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (tem, 0)))
6513				  == MODE_FLOAT)
6514			      && GET_CODE (goal) == CONST_INT
6515			      && 0 != (goaltry
6516				       = operand_subword (XEXP (tem, 0), 0, 0,
6517							  VOIDmode))
6518			      && rtx_equal_p (goal, goaltry)
6519			      && (valtry
6520				  = operand_subword (SET_DEST (pat), 0, 0,
6521						     VOIDmode))
6522			      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry)) >= 0)))
6523		  || (goal_const && (tem = find_reg_note (p, REG_EQUIV,
6524							  NULL_RTX))
6525		      && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) == REG
6526		      && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CONST_DOUBLE
6527		      && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (tem, 0)))
6528			  == MODE_FLOAT)
6529		      && GET_CODE (goal) == CONST_INT
6530		      && 0 != (goaltry = operand_subword (XEXP (tem, 0), 1, 0,
6531							  VOIDmode))
6532		      && rtx_equal_p (goal, goaltry)
6533		      && (valtry
6534			  = operand_subword (SET_DEST (pat), 1, 0, VOIDmode))
6535		      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry)) >= 0)))
6536	    {
6537	      if (other >= 0)
6538		{
6539		  if (valueno != other)
6540		    continue;
6541		}
6542	      else if ((unsigned) valueno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6543		continue;
6544	      else
6545		{
6546		  int i;
6547
6548		  for (i = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6549		    if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
6550					     valueno + i))
6551		      break;
6552		  if (i >= 0)
6553		    continue;
6554		}
6555	      value = valtry;
6556	      where = p;
6557	      break;
6558	    }
6559	}
6560    }
6561
6562  /* We found a previous insn copying GOAL into a suitable other reg VALUE
6563     (or copying VALUE into GOAL, if GOAL is also a register).
6564     Now verify that VALUE is really valid.  */
6565
6566  /* VALUENO is the register number of VALUE; a hard register.  */
6567
6568  /* Don't try to re-use something that is killed in this insn.  We want
6569     to be able to trust REG_UNUSED notes.  */
6570  if (REG_NOTES (where) != 0 && find_reg_note (where, REG_UNUSED, value))
6571    return 0;
6572
6573  /* If we propose to get the value from the stack pointer or if GOAL is
6574     a MEM based on the stack pointer, we need a stable SP.  */
6575  if (valueno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
6576      || (goal_mem && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (stack_pointer_rtx,
6577							  goal)))
6578    need_stable_sp = 1;
6579
6580  /* Reject VALUE if the copy-insn moved the wrong sort of datum.  */
6581  if (GET_MODE (value) != mode)
6582    return 0;
6583
6584  /* Reject VALUE if it was loaded from GOAL
6585     and is also a register that appears in the address of GOAL.  */
6586
6587  if (goal_mem && value == SET_DEST (single_set (where))
6588      && refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (valueno,
6589				       (valueno
6590					+ HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode)),
6591				       goal, (rtx*) 0))
6592    return 0;
6593
6594  /* Reject registers that overlap GOAL.  */
6595
6596  if (!goal_mem && !goal_const
6597      && regno + (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode) > valueno
6598      && regno < valueno + (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode))
6599    return 0;
6600
6601  nregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode);
6602  valuenregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode);
6603
6604  /* Reject VALUE if it is one of the regs reserved for reloads.
6605     Reload1 knows how to reuse them anyway, and it would get
6606     confused if we allocated one without its knowledge.
6607     (Now that insns introduced by reload are ignored above,
6608     this case shouldn't happen, but I'm not positive.)  */
6609
6610  if (reload_reg_p != 0 && reload_reg_p != (short *) (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1)
6611    {
6612      int i;
6613      for (i = 0; i < valuenregs; ++i)
6614	if (reload_reg_p[valueno + i] >= 0)
6615	  return 0;
6616    }
6617
6618  /* Reject VALUE if it is a register being used for an input reload
6619     even if it is not one of those reserved.  */
6620
6621  if (reload_reg_p != 0)
6622    {
6623      int i;
6624      for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
6625	if (rld[i].reg_rtx != 0 && rld[i].in)
6626	  {
6627	    int regno1 = REGNO (rld[i].reg_rtx);
6628	    int nregs1 = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno1,
6629					   GET_MODE (rld[i].reg_rtx));
6630	    if (regno1 < valueno + valuenregs
6631		&& regno1 + nregs1 > valueno)
6632	      return 0;
6633	  }
6634    }
6635
6636  if (goal_mem)
6637    /* We must treat frame pointer as varying here,
6638       since it can vary--in a nonlocal goto as generated by expand_goto.  */
6639    goal_mem_addr_varies = !CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (goal, 0));
6640
6641  /* Now verify that the values of GOAL and VALUE remain unaltered
6642     until INSN is reached.  */
6643
6644  p = insn;
6645  while (1)
6646    {
6647      p = PREV_INSN (p);
6648      if (p == where)
6649	return value;
6650
6651      /* Don't trust the conversion past a function call
6652	 if either of the two is in a call-clobbered register, or memory.  */
6653      if (GET_CODE (p) == CALL_INSN)
6654	{
6655	  int i;
6656
6657	  if (goal_mem || need_stable_sp)
6658	    return 0;
6659
6660	  if (regno >= 0 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6661	    for (i = 0; i < nregs; ++i)
6662	      if (call_used_regs[regno + i])
6663		return 0;
6664
6665	  if (valueno >= 0 && valueno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6666	    for (i = 0; i < valuenregs; ++i)
6667	      if (call_used_regs[valueno + i])
6668		return 0;
6669#ifdef NON_SAVING_SETJMP
6670	  if (NON_SAVING_SETJMP && find_reg_note (p, REG_SETJMP, NULL))
6671	    return 0;
6672#endif
6673	}
6674
6675      if (INSN_P (p))
6676	{
6677	  pat = PATTERN (p);
6678
6679	  /* Watch out for unspec_volatile, and volatile asms.  */
6680	  if (volatile_insn_p (pat))
6681	    return 0;
6682
6683	  /* If this insn P stores in either GOAL or VALUE, return 0.
6684	     If GOAL is a memory ref and this insn writes memory, return 0.
6685	     If GOAL is a memory ref and its address is not constant,
6686	     and this insn P changes a register used in GOAL, return 0.  */
6687
6688	  if (GET_CODE (pat) == COND_EXEC)
6689	    pat = COND_EXEC_CODE (pat);
6690	  if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET || GET_CODE (pat) == CLOBBER)
6691	    {
6692	      rtx dest = SET_DEST (pat);
6693	      while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6694		     || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6695		     || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6696		     || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6697		dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6698	      if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
6699		{
6700		  int xregno = REGNO (dest);
6701		  int xnregs;
6702		  if (REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6703		    xnregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (xregno, GET_MODE (dest));
6704		  else
6705		    xnregs = 1;
6706		  if (xregno < regno + nregs && xregno + xnregs > regno)
6707		    return 0;
6708		  if (xregno < valueno + valuenregs
6709		      && xregno + xnregs > valueno)
6710		    return 0;
6711		  if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6712		      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (dest, goal))
6713		    return 0;
6714		  if (xregno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM && need_stable_sp)
6715		    return 0;
6716		}
6717	      else if (goal_mem && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6718		       && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6719		return 0;
6720	      else if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM && regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6721		       && reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0)
6722		return 0;
6723	      else if (need_stable_sp && push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6724		return 0;
6725	    }
6726	  else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
6727	    {
6728	      int i;
6729	      for (i = XVECLEN (pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6730		{
6731		  rtx v1 = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
6732		  if (GET_CODE (v1) == COND_EXEC)
6733		    v1 = COND_EXEC_CODE (v1);
6734		  if (GET_CODE (v1) == SET || GET_CODE (v1) == CLOBBER)
6735		    {
6736		      rtx dest = SET_DEST (v1);
6737		      while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6738			     || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6739			     || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6740			     || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6741			dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6742		      if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
6743			{
6744			  int xregno = REGNO (dest);
6745			  int xnregs;
6746			  if (REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6747			    xnregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (xregno, GET_MODE (dest));
6748			  else
6749			    xnregs = 1;
6750			  if (xregno < regno + nregs
6751			      && xregno + xnregs > regno)
6752			    return 0;
6753			  if (xregno < valueno + valuenregs
6754			      && xregno + xnregs > valueno)
6755			    return 0;
6756			  if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6757			      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (dest,
6758								     goal))
6759			    return 0;
6760			  if (xregno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM && need_stable_sp)
6761			    return 0;
6762			}
6763		      else if (goal_mem && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6764			       && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6765			return 0;
6766		      else if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM && regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6767			       && reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0)
6768			return 0;
6769		      else if (need_stable_sp
6770			       && push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6771			return 0;
6772		    }
6773		}
6774	    }
6775
6776	  if (GET_CODE (p) == CALL_INSN && CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (p))
6777	    {
6778	      rtx link;
6779
6780	      for (link = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (p); XEXP (link, 1) != 0;
6781		   link = XEXP (link, 1))
6782		{
6783		  pat = XEXP (link, 0);
6784		  if (GET_CODE (pat) == CLOBBER)
6785		    {
6786		      rtx dest = SET_DEST (pat);
6787
6788		      if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
6789			{
6790			  int xregno = REGNO (dest);
6791			  int xnregs
6792			    = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (xregno, GET_MODE (dest));
6793
6794			  if (xregno < regno + nregs
6795			      && xregno + xnregs > regno)
6796			    return 0;
6797			  else if (xregno < valueno + valuenregs
6798				   && xregno + xnregs > valueno)
6799			    return 0;
6800			  else if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6801				   && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (dest,
6802								     goal))
6803			    return 0;
6804			}
6805
6806		      else if (goal_mem && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6807			       && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6808			return 0;
6809		      else if (need_stable_sp
6810			       && push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6811			return 0;
6812		    }
6813		}
6814	    }
6815
6816#ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
6817	  /* If this insn auto-increments or auto-decrements
6818	     either regno or valueno, return 0 now.
6819	     If GOAL is a memory ref and its address is not constant,
6820	     and this insn P increments a register used in GOAL, return 0.  */
6821	  {
6822	    rtx link;
6823
6824	    for (link = REG_NOTES (p); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
6825	      if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
6826		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (link, 0)) == REG)
6827		{
6828		  int incno = REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
6829		  if (incno < regno + nregs && incno >= regno)
6830		    return 0;
6831		  if (incno < valueno + valuenregs && incno >= valueno)
6832		    return 0;
6833		  if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6834		      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (link, 0),
6835							     goal))
6836		    return 0;
6837		}
6838	  }
6839#endif
6840	}
6841    }
6842}
6843
6844/* Find a place where INCED appears in an increment or decrement operator
6845   within X, and return the amount INCED is incremented or decremented by.
6846   The value is always positive.  */
6847
6848static int
6849find_inc_amount (rtx x, rtx inced)
6850{
6851  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
6852  const char *fmt;
6853  int i;
6854
6855  if (code == MEM)
6856    {
6857      rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0);
6858      if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC
6859	   || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC
6860	   || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
6861	   || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
6862	  && XEXP (addr, 0) == inced)
6863	return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
6864      else if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_MODIFY
6865		|| GET_CODE (addr) == POST_MODIFY)
6866	       && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == PLUS
6867	       && XEXP (addr, 0) == XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 0)
6868	       && XEXP (addr, 0) == inced
6869	       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT)
6870	{
6871	  i = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1));
6872	  return i < 0 ? -i : i;
6873	}
6874    }
6875
6876  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6877  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6878    {
6879      if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6880	{
6881	  int tem = find_inc_amount (XEXP (x, i), inced);
6882	  if (tem != 0)
6883	    return tem;
6884	}
6885      if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6886	{
6887	  int j;
6888	  for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6889	    {
6890	      int tem = find_inc_amount (XVECEXP (x, i, j), inced);
6891	      if (tem != 0)
6892		return tem;
6893	    }
6894	}
6895    }
6896
6897  return 0;
6898}
6899
6900/* Return 1 if register REGNO is the subject of a clobber in insn INSN.
6901   If SETS is nonzero, also consider SETs.  */
6902
6903int
6904regno_clobbered_p (unsigned int regno, rtx insn, enum machine_mode mode,
6905		   int sets)
6906{
6907  unsigned int nregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode);
6908  unsigned int endregno = regno + nregs;
6909
6910  if ((GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER
6911       || (sets && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET))
6912      && GET_CODE (XEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0)) == REG)
6913    {
6914      unsigned int test = REGNO (XEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0));
6915
6916      return test >= regno && test < endregno;
6917    }
6918
6919  if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6920    {
6921      int i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1;
6922
6923      for (; i >= 0; i--)
6924	{
6925	  rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
6926	  if ((GET_CODE (elt) == CLOBBER
6927	       || (sets && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET))
6928	      && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt, 0)) == REG)
6929	    {
6930	      unsigned int test = REGNO (XEXP (elt, 0));
6931
6932	      if (test >= regno && test < endregno)
6933		return 1;
6934	    }
6935	}
6936    }
6937
6938  return 0;
6939}
6940
6941/* Find the low part, with mode MODE, of a hard regno RELOADREG.  */
6942rtx
6943reload_adjust_reg_for_mode (rtx reloadreg, enum machine_mode mode)
6944{
6945  int regno;
6946
6947  if (GET_MODE (reloadreg) == mode)
6948    return reloadreg;
6949
6950  regno = REGNO (reloadreg);
6951
6952  if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
6953    regno += HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (reloadreg))
6954      - HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode);
6955
6956  return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
6957}
6958
6959static const char *const reload_when_needed_name[] =
6960{
6961  "RELOAD_FOR_INPUT",
6962  "RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT",
6963  "RELOAD_FOR_INSN",
6964  "RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS",
6965  "RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS",
6966  "RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS",
6967  "RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS",
6968  "RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS",
6969  "RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR",
6970  "RELOAD_OTHER",
6971  "RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS"
6972};
6973
6974static const char * const reg_class_names[] = REG_CLASS_NAMES;
6975
6976/* These functions are used to print the variables set by 'find_reloads' */
6977
6978void
6979debug_reload_to_stream (FILE *f)
6980{
6981  int r;
6982  const char *prefix;
6983
6984  if (! f)
6985    f = stderr;
6986  for (r = 0; r < n_reloads; r++)
6987    {
6988      fprintf (f, "Reload %d: ", r);
6989
6990      if (rld[r].in != 0)
6991	{
6992	  fprintf (f, "reload_in (%s) = ",
6993		   GET_MODE_NAME (rld[r].inmode));
6994	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].in, 24);
6995	  fprintf (f, "\n\t");
6996	}
6997
6998      if (rld[r].out != 0)
6999	{
7000	  fprintf (f, "reload_out (%s) = ",
7001		   GET_MODE_NAME (rld[r].outmode));
7002	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].out, 24);
7003	  fprintf (f, "\n\t");
7004	}
7005
7006      fprintf (f, "%s, ", reg_class_names[(int) rld[r].class]);
7007
7008      fprintf (f, "%s (opnum = %d)",
7009	       reload_when_needed_name[(int) rld[r].when_needed],
7010	       rld[r].opnum);
7011
7012      if (rld[r].optional)
7013	fprintf (f, ", optional");
7014
7015      if (rld[r].nongroup)
7016	fprintf (f, ", nongroup");
7017
7018      if (rld[r].inc != 0)
7019	fprintf (f, ", inc by %d", rld[r].inc);
7020
7021      if (rld[r].nocombine)
7022	fprintf (f, ", can't combine");
7023
7024      if (rld[r].secondary_p)
7025	fprintf (f, ", secondary_reload_p");
7026
7027      if (rld[r].in_reg != 0)
7028	{
7029	  fprintf (f, "\n\treload_in_reg: ");
7030	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].in_reg, 24);
7031	}
7032
7033      if (rld[r].out_reg != 0)
7034	{
7035	  fprintf (f, "\n\treload_out_reg: ");
7036	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].out_reg, 24);
7037	}
7038
7039      if (rld[r].reg_rtx != 0)
7040	{
7041	  fprintf (f, "\n\treload_reg_rtx: ");
7042	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].reg_rtx, 24);
7043	}
7044
7045      prefix = "\n\t";
7046      if (rld[r].secondary_in_reload != -1)
7047	{
7048	  fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_in_reload = %d",
7049		   prefix, rld[r].secondary_in_reload);
7050	  prefix = ", ";
7051	}
7052
7053      if (rld[r].secondary_out_reload != -1)
7054	fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_out_reload = %d\n",
7055		 prefix, rld[r].secondary_out_reload);
7056
7057      prefix = "\n\t";
7058      if (rld[r].secondary_in_icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
7059	{
7060	  fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_in_icode = %s", prefix,
7061		   insn_data[rld[r].secondary_in_icode].name);
7062	  prefix = ", ";
7063	}
7064
7065      if (rld[r].secondary_out_icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
7066	fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_out_icode = %s", prefix,
7067		 insn_data[rld[r].secondary_out_icode].name);
7068
7069      fprintf (f, "\n");
7070    }
7071}
7072
7073void
7074debug_reload (void)
7075{
7076  debug_reload_to_stream (stderr);
7077}
7078